JP6982344B1 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming machine capable of easily designing a production and notifying the contents in an easy-to-understand manner. SOLUTION: During the expectation degree suggestion production, it is suggested that the privilege is given and the expectation degree is given by displaying the frame image in the outer peripheral region. The frame image in the outer peripheral region is hidden by the time the winning notification effect different from the expectation suggestion effect is started. Even during the winning notification effect, a frame image suggesting that the privilege of the plurality of frame images is given at the result notification timing may be displayed, and the outer peripheral area common to that during the expectation degree suggestion effect is displayed. Displayed using. [Selection diagram] FIG. 27

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As an example of a gaming machine, a plurality of reels in which multiple types of symbols are arranged are provided, and a start switch is operated with a bet number set using medals or the like to perform a winning combination lottery and start the rotation of the reels. Then, the rotation of the reels is stopped based on the result of the winning combination lottery and the operation mode (pushing order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switch, and the medal is according to the combination of the symbols on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. There are slot machines that can give benefits including payouts. In addition, as an advantageous state for the player, a bonus that improves the winning probability of a predetermined role (for example, a small role or a replay), RT (Replay Time), and the result of the role lottery result in winning a plurality of roles. There is also a slot machine provided with an AT (Assist Time) that notifies the player of operation information that is advantageous to the player in order to win a winning combination with a larger privilege. In addition, a pachinko gaming machine that launches a pachinko ball into the game area and wins a prize at the start winning opening provided in the game area to variably display a plurality of types of symbols and then stop the pachinko game machine to display the symbol combination. Are known.

Further, in such a gaming machine, as an effect relating to the granting of a privilege, for example, there is one that executes a gauge effect of notifying by a gauge amount of a meter that increases according to an operation (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-76796

However, when performing a gauge effect on a conventional gaming machine, the content of the effect to be developed (progressed) in the background of the meter is limited to the content that matches the gauge effect, which narrows the degree of freedom and responds to the operation. Therefore, it is necessary to perform processing for updating the gauge amount, which increases the processing load, and as a result, there is a risk that the design becomes complicated and difficult.

In addition, in recent years, various productions, not limited to gauge productions, have been diversified, and if each production develops its own production content, the notification content (what is the intended production, how? It became difficult for the player to understand what kind of expectations he had, and there was a risk that the visibility of the production would be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily designing an effect and informing the contents in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine according to a certain aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is expected to be given a privilege advantageous to the player by displaying the effect image in the display area. By displaying the effect image in the display area after the specific effect execution means for executing the suggested specific effect and the game started after the specific effect is completed, it is notified whether or not the privilege is given. A special effect executing means for executing the special effect is provided, and during the specific effect, a first-class effect image suggesting that the privilege is given in the outer peripheral area surrounding the center of the display area is displayed. In the case of displaying the second kind of effect image suggesting the degree of expectation that the privilege is given unlike the first kind in the outer peripheral region, and the expectation suggested in the outer peripheral region. In some cases, a third type of effect image having a lower degree than that of the second type may be displayed, and during the specific effect, one of the first type, the second type, and the third type of effect image may be displayed. When displayed in the outer peripheral region, the effect image in the outer peripheral region is hidden at the timing until the special effect is started, and when the notification for granting the privilege is given in the special effect, the specific timing In some cases, the first type of effect image may be displayed using an outer peripheral area common to that during the specific effect, and when a notification is given that the privilege is not given in the special effect, the first type is displayed even after the specific timing. No seeds, the second kind, or the third kind of effect images are displayed .

According to this configuration, it is suggested that the privilege is given and the degree of expectation is given by displaying the first to third types of effect images in the outer peripheral area of the display area during the specific effect. Therefore, even if the content of the specific effect is designed without considering the content of the effect images of the first to third types, there is a sense of discomfort in the relationship between the effect images of the first to third types and the image of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to design without narrowing the degree of freedom of the specific effect, and further, the visibility of the image of the specific effect is lowered by the first to third types of effect images. It can be prevented from being stored.

Further, the effect image in the outer peripheral region is hidden by the time a special effect different from the specific effect is started. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the effect image in the outer peripheral region displayed during the specific effect from being continuously executed until after the special effect of another effect is started, and the suggestion target becomes difficult to understand. .. Further, even during the special effect, the first type of effect image may be displayed at a specific timing, and is displayed using the outer peripheral area common to that during the specific effect. For this reason, the suggestion that the privilege is given during the special production is easier for the player to understand than the suggestion that the production image completely different from that during the specific production is performed in a completely different area. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the image of the special effect from being lowered by the effect image.

Preferably, neither the second type of effect image nor the third type of effect image is displayed during the special effect.

According to this configuration, since the second and third types of production images are not displayed during the special production, it is possible to differentiate from the specific production, provide fun, and provide a plurality of productions. It is possible to prevent the image from being displayed and making it difficult to understand the content of the effect related to the granting of benefits. In addition, when the second type of effect image is displayed during the specific effect, if the third effect image is generated during the special effect, the expectation may be lowered and it may be aroused. It is possible to prevent the expectation from being lowered.

Preferably, during the specific effect, the third type of effect image can be displayed at the first timing, and the second type of effect image is displayed at the second timing after the first timing. It is possible to display the first type of effect image at a third timing after the second timing, and the second type of effect image is a display of the third type of effect image. There are cases where it is displayed after passing through the above, and there are cases where it is displayed without displaying the third type of effect image. The first type of effect image is the second type of effect image and the third type of effect image. It is displayed after at least one of the second type of effect image and the third type of effect image is displayed at a higher frequency than it is displayed without any display of the seed effect image.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player an impression of a bummed bottom because the expectation is lowered according to the progress of the specific effect. Further, when the first type of effect image is displayed, at least one of the second type of effect image and the third type of effect image is frequently displayed, so that the expectation is gradually increased. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first type of effect image will be displayed when either the second type of effect image or the third type of effect image is displayed.

Preferably, the first type of effect image is an image using a color belonging to the first type, and the second type of effect image is an image using a color belonging to the second type, and the third type of effect image is used. The effect image is an image using a color belonging to the third type, and the color belonging to the first type includes a color belonging to the second type and a color belonging to the third type, and is displayed in the outer peripheral region. Regardless of the type of the effect image, the outer peripheral region is defined as a common frame-shaped region.

According to this configuration, the first type of effect image suggesting that the privilege is given is an image including any color used for the second type of effect image and the third type of effect image. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively notify the player that the degree of expectation is high in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the first to third types of effect images are displayed using a common outer peripheral region having a frame shape, regardless of the type of effect image. As a result, the suggestion information can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Preferably, the display area can be displayed by superimposing a plurality of layers on which an image can be drawn, and among the effect images that can be displayed in the outer peripheral area, the first type of effect image and the second type of effect are produced. The image and the layer on which the third type of effect image is drawn are the effect image of the first type, the second type of effect image, and the third type of effect images that can be displayed in the outer peripheral region. It is a layer higher than the layer on which the effect image other than the effect image is drawn.

According to this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare individual production data for each of the first to third types of production images and for each display timing as the production data for executing the specific production and the like. , It is not necessary to secure an enormous amount of storage capacity for storing production data. In addition, the first to third types of effect images can be displayed at a higher level for the specific effect and the like, and the player can be surely recognized the degree of expectation and the like.

Preferably, in the effect image of the first type, the effect image of the second type, and the effect image of the third type, only the effect image may not be displayed in the display area, and the display area may be used. It can be displayed when the effect using the central area of is being executed.

According to this configuration, the first to third types of effect images are not displayed independently, but are executed together with the effect using the central area, so that the effect image is displayed only in the outer peripheral area. This can prevent the content of the production from becoming difficult to understand.

Preferably, when the effect image is displayed in the outer peripheral region, a specific image different from any of the first type, the second type, and the third type is displayed in the region overlapping with the outer peripheral region. When displaying the specific image together with the effect image of any one of the first type, the second type, and the third type, the specific image is displayed with priority over the effect image.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the specific image from being impaired by the effect images of the first to third types, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specific image.

Preferably, the light emitting means that emits light with a plurality of types of colors is provided, the first type of effect image is an image using a color belonging to the first type, and the second type of effect image is a color belonging to the second type. The third type of effect image is an image using a color belonging to the third type, and the light emitting means displays the first type of effect image in the outer peripheral region. When the effect images of the second type and the third type are displayed, the light is emitted in the same manner as when the effect images are not displayed. ..

According to this configuration, when the second type and third type effect images are displayed, the cooperation with the light emitting means is not performed, while when the first type effect image is displayed, the color used for the effect image is used. By coordinating with the color of the light emitting means, it is possible to provide the player with a unified effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the existence value and premier feeling of the first-class production image.

Preferably, the specific timing is a timing for notifying the result of whether or not the privilege is given in the special effect.

According to this configuration, by displaying the first type of effect image at an appropriate timing according to the progress of the special effect, it is possible to effectively inspire while visually enlivening the result when notifying the result in the special effect. , The interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. It is a development view of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a slot machine. It is a flowchart for demonstrating game control processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the push order buffer setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating pseudo game processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a reel start process. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning combination group. (A) is a diagram for explaining a winning combination group that satisfies the advantageous period transition condition, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the winning combination group that satisfies the AT transition lottery condition and the AT winning probability. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the state transition in an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the game identification lamp control process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating navigation-related processing. It is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when a pseudo game occurs in AT. It is a figure which shows the display mode example of the notification display, the liquid crystal display, and the game identification lamp. It is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when a pseudo game occurs in normal times. It is a figure which shows the display mode example of the notification display, the liquid crystal display, and the game identification lamp. It is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when an advantageous period notification lamp lights up in a game in which a pseudo game occurs during normal operation. It is a figure which shows the display mode example of the notification display, the liquid crystal display, and the game identification lamp. It is a timing chart for explaining a pseudo stop pattern. It is a timing chart for explaining the display start timing in a notification display. It is a timing chart for explaining the lighting start timing of the advantageous period notification lamp. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing about the pseudo game specific notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the image of the pseudo game specific notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the expectation degree suggestion effect and the hit notification effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example in the liquid crystal display when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example in the liquid crystal display when the hit notification effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the transformation example which is related to the frame image to be displayed in the outer peripheral area. (A) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1', and (b) is for explaining a part of the winning combination to be the target of the winning combination lottery in RT1 and the high and low of the winning probability. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure for demonstrating a part of a combination subject to a combination lottery in RT2 and the high and low of the winning probability. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the payout rate of RT1 and RT2. It is a development view of the reel of the slot machine 1 ". It is a figure for demonstrating the role name, a symbol combination, etc. of a slot machine 1 ". It is a figure for demonstrating the winning combination group, combination composition, etc. of a slot machine 1 ". It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of each game state and advantageous period of a slot machine 1 ".

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a slot machine capable of executing a game using a medal as a gaming medium (gaming value) will be described. However, the gaming machine is not limited to such a slot machine, and is not a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a gaming ball as a gaming medium or a gaming medium (game value of a tangible object such as a medal), but internally. It may be another gaming machine such as a gaming machine capable of playing a game using the score given to (the gaming value of an intangible object such as information recorded by an electromagnetic method).

<Slot machine configuration example>
The overall configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened.

The slot machine 1 is composed of a member including a box-shaped housing 3 having an opening on the front surface and a front door 5 which is openably and closably attached to one side of the housing 3. The front surface of the housing 3 is closed by closing the front door 5 with respect to the housing 3. The front door 5 can be locked / unlocked with respect to the housing 3 by the door key managed by the manager of the game hall. Whether or not the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3 is detected by the door sensor 20.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display window 7 is provided in the central portion of the front door 5. From the display window 7, reels 11L, 11M, 11R (hereinafter collectively referred to as reels 11L to 11R) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged can be visually recognized. When the reels 11L to 11R rotate, a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R are variably displayed can be visually recognized from the display window 7. In this way, the display window 7 and the reels 11L to 11R form a variable display unit 13 that variably displays a plurality of symbols.

The variable display unit 13 includes a plurality of variable display columns 10. Specifically, the variable display unit 13 is a left variable display row 10L composed of a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11L and the reel 11L, and a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11M. It has a medium variable display row 10M composed of a reel 11M and a right variable display row 10R composed of a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11R and the reel 11R. When the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the left variable display row 10L, the middle variable display row 10M, and the right variable display row 10R can each stop and display the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower rows. Therefore, nine symbols can be visually recognized from the display window 7.

In the present embodiment, as the winning line to be determined for winning the winning combination, a line composed of the middle row of the left variable display row 10L, the upper row of the middle variable display row 10M, and the lower row of the right variable display row 10R is set. A winning line NL is drawn on the display window 7.

A liquid crystal display 27 is provided above the display window 7 of the front door 5. The liquid crystal display 27 executes an effect by displaying a predetermined image according to the progress of the game. Further, above the liquid crystal display 27 of the front door 5, an explanation panel 29 on which a predetermined combination of patterns and the number of payouts are printed is provided, and further above and to the left and right of the explanation panel 29. , Lamp portions 33L, 33M, 33R are provided. The lamp units 33L, 33M, and 33R are provided with a light source such as an LED, and emit light according to the progress of the game to execute the effect.

On the left side of the display window 7 of the front door 5, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, and a notification display 60 are arranged. The notification display 60 is a display for notifying predetermined information for specifying an operation mode (for example, operation timing, push order, etc., hereinafter also referred to as an advantageous operation mode) that is advantageous to the player, a combination lottery result, and the like. It is a vessel. The notification display 60 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies operation information and the like related to an advantageous operation mode according to the lighting mode of each segment. Further, the notification display 60 has a dot LED mounted on the lower right of the 7-segment LED, and the dot LED constitutes an advantageous period notification lamp 80.

The advantageous period notification lamp 80 is a display that notifies that it is an advantageous period (hereinafter referred to as an advantageous period) in which an AT game capable of notifying an advantageous operation mode can be tolerated. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 can be turned on during the advantageous period, is turned on at least when the advantageous operation mode is notified, and is turned off when the advantageous period ends and the normal period is entered.

The credit display 45 displays the number of medals stored (stored) in the slot machine 1 among the medals owned by the player. The maximum number of credits is set to 50. The payout display 46 is a display that displays the number of medals (game media) to be paid out when a winning combination occurs, and also displays various information such as error information and setting suggestion information. The setting suggestion information is information that makes it possible to specify at least one of the set values 1 to 6, and is information that suggests the set set value. Like the notification display 60, the credit display 45 and the payout display 46 are composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and notify information according to the lighting mode of each segment.

A game identification lamp 82 is arranged on the right side of the display window 7 of the front door 5. On the irradiation surface that irradiates the light from the game identification lamp 82, for example, one of the characters "pseudo game", "AT", and "CZ" stands out depending on the color of the light. Changing processing is applied so that the person can see it. Therefore, by changing the lighting mode (lighting color) of the game specifying lamp 82, it is possible to notify any of "pseudo game", "AT", and "CZ" according to the progress of the game. It becomes. FIG. 1 shows a state in which a "pseudo-game" indicating that a pseudo-game, which will be described later, is being performed is being notified.

Various operation units are provided below the display window 7 of the front door 5. The operation unit includes a bet switch 15, a maximum bet switch 17, an effect operation unit 81, a chance switch 81F, a start switch 19, a settlement switch 23, a stop switch 21L, 21M, and 21R (hereinafter collectively referred to as stop switches 21L to 21R). ), And a medal slot 25 is provided.

The bet switch 15 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of bets for one medal using credits. The maximum bet switch 17 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of medals for the maximum number of bets using credits. The maximum bet number means the maximum number of bets that can be set for one game (hereinafter, also referred to as one game) (set to "3" in this embodiment). The maximum bet switch 17 has a built-in LED, and when the bet number can be set, the maximum bet switch 17 emits light in a predetermined mode (blinking state, lighting state).

The effect operation unit 81 is a switch for detecting an operation for shifting to a player menu state for displaying a game history or the like, an administrator menu state for displaying a setting history, or the like. The chance switch 81F is a switch that detects an operation related to the effect. The operation related to the effect may be detected by a part of the operation unit (for example, the determination switch 81a) of the effect operation unit 81, and the operation unit may be used as the chance switch 81F. Operations related to the production include operations for executing and developing the production, operations for selecting the production mode and characters, and a player menu for displaying the game history, etc. An administrator menu for displaying the status, setting history, etc. Includes operations for transitioning to the state.

The start switch 19 is a switch for detecting an operation for starting the variable display of the symbol by rotating each of the reels 11L to 11R. The checkout switch 23 is a switch that detects an operation for paying out medals corresponding to the number of credits or set bets. The stop switches 21L to 21R are switches for detecting an operation for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels of the reels 11L to 11R to stop the variable display of the symbol. Further, the stop switches 21L to 21R are switches for detecting an operation for stopping the rotation of the reel and pseudo-stopping the symbol during the pseudo game described later. Further, the start switch 19 is a switch that also detects an operation for ending the pseudo game and starting the reel rotation as the main game in a state where the reel is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game. The medal insertion slot 25 is an opening for a player to insert a medal.

Various switches including the start switch 19, the settlement switch 23, the stop switches 21L to 21R, the effect operation unit 81, and the chance switch 81F detect the operation to the operation unit (button unit) corresponding to each. The operation unit corresponding to various switches is composed of a transmissive member that transmits light. In addition, a light source such as an LED is mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to various switches, and it is produced by emitting light at a timing that can be operated according to the progress of the game (timing at which the operation is effectively accepted). To execute.

Below the various operation units on the front door 5, a lower panel 35 on which a character or the like is printed is provided. Further, lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided on the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, respectively. The lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided with a light source such as an LED, and emit light according to the progress of the game to execute the effect.

Further, below the lower panel 35, a medal payout exit 39 for paying out medals in response to the occurrence of winning a prize and the like, and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout exit 39 are provided. Speakers 31L and 31R are provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout exit 39, respectively, for producing effects by outputting sound effects, voices, and the like according to the progress of the game.

Next, the internal configuration of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a reel unit 9 for accommodating reels 11L to 11R side by side is provided in the center of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1. The reel unit 9 is fixed to the rear wall in the housing 3. The reel unit 9 includes reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter also referred to as reel motors 14L to 14R) and position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter also referred to as position sensors 55L to 55R). It has).

The reel motors 14L to 14R are fixed side by side with respect to the frame of the reel unit 9, respectively, and the corresponding reels of the reels 11L to 11R are fixed to the rotation shaft thereof. As a result, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate and stop. The reel motors 14L to 14R are configured by, for example, a stepping motor.

The position sensors 55L to 55R are sensors for detecting that the protrusions provided on the reels 11L to 11R have passed a predetermined position as the reels rotate. The position sensors 55L to 55R are configured by, for example, a photo interrupter. When the position sensors 55L to 55R detect the protrusions of the corresponding reels, the symbol at a predetermined position on the reel (for example, the symbol of symbol number 19 in FIG. 3) is located in the middle of the display window 7. It is configured in.

Above the reel unit 9, the main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are installed in a state of being housed in a board case. The board case cannot come into contact with the control board unless, for example, some members are destroyed so that the traces can be easily discriminated if the control board or the like housed in the board case is fraudulent. It has a structure. Further, the main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are electrically connected by a signal line connecting the boards.

A hopper unit 43 is provided below the reel unit 9. The hopper unit 43 includes a hopper container 42, a full tank sensor 58 (see FIG. 4), a hopper motor 57 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 54 (see FIG. 4).

The hopper container 42 is a container for storing medals received from the medal slot 25. The full tank sensor 58 is a sensor provided at a predetermined position of the hopper container 42 and detects that the medals stored in the hopper container 42 are in a full tank state when the predetermined amount is reached.

The hopper motor 57 is a motor that is driven when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied and is driven to discharge a predetermined number of medals stored in the hopper container 42. The hopper motor 57 is composed of, for example, a DC motor (Direct Current Motor). The payout sensor 54 is a sensor that detects medals discharged from the hopper container 42 one by one by the hopper motor 57. The medals detected by the payout sensor 54 are paid out from the medal payout outlet 39 via the medal chute 47 provided below the back side of the front door 5.

On the left side of the hopper unit 43, a power supply unit 49 for supplying electric power to various devices included in the slot machine 1 is arranged. The power supply unit 49 is provided with a power supply switch 50, a reset switch 52, and a change processing start switch 56.

The power switch 50 is a switch for switching whether or not power is supplied to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 52 is a switch for detecting a setting value switching operation during the setting change processing in which the setting value can be changed. The reset switch 52 is also used as a switch for canceling an error when an error occurs. The change processing start switch 56 includes a key cylinder for setting change processing, and is a switch for detecting an operation for shifting to the setting change processing. The switch provided inside the housing 3 including the change processing start switch 56 is a switch that can be operated when the front door 5 is open. Therefore, basically, only the manager of the amusement park can operate it.

The set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for specifying the winning probability of winning a predetermined combination in the combination lottery. In the winning combination lottery, the winning probability of winning a winning combination can be made different by using the winning probability according to the set value. That is, when the set value is different, the winning probability of winning in the winning combination lottery may be different even if the winning combination is the same. As a result, the number of medals to be paid out during the predetermined number of times of the game is different according to the set value, and as a result, the payout rate can be different. Therefore, it can be said that the set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and also a value for specifying the payout rate. As the set value, for example, 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities (in this embodiment, four stages of set values 1, 2, 5, and 6) are provided, and the set value 1 is the lowest payout rate. , The set value 6 is the highest payout rate. The set value may be set in 6 stages of 1 to 6. The setting value can be changed by shifting to the setting change processing by turning on the power with the change processing start switch 56 turned on by the setting change key managed by the game hall administrator.

The set value can be sequentially switched (for example, ... 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 5 ...) by operating the reset switch 52 during the setting change process. During the setting change process, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46. In the setting change process, after the operation to the start switch 19 is detected, the change process start switch 56 is turned off to store the set value displayed at that time. As a result, the change of the set value is completed, and in the subsequent games, a combination lottery or the like, which will be described later, is performed based on the stored set value. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized.

On the back surface side of the front door 5, a medal selector 48 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the medal insertion slot 25. The medal selector 48 physically selects whether or not the medals inserted in the medal insertion slot 25 are legitimate, and the legitimate medals are stored on the first flow path 40 side for being stored in the hopper container 42. On the other hand, for non-regular medals, it has a structure for guiding to the second flow path 44 side for discharging to the outside.

Further, the medal selector 48 includes a switching solenoid 51 (see FIG. 4) and a charging sensor 53 (see FIG. 4). The switching solenoid 51 is a solenoid for forcibly switching the inserted medals to the second flow path 44 side according to the game situation (for example, during reel rotation, when the credit upper limit is reached, etc.). The insertion sensor 53 is a sensor that detects one medal guided to the first flow path 40 side among the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25. The medals detected by the charging sensor 53 are stored in the hopper container 42 in a state where the front door 5 is closed. On the other hand, the medal guided to the second flow path 44 side is discharged from the medal payout outlet 39 via the medal chute 47.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the symbol arrangement of each of the reels 11L to 11R will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order on the reels 11L to 11R, respectively. In FIG. 3, for convenience of explanation, a plurality of types of symbols are indicated by character strings such as "R7", "B7", "BAR", "REP", "BEL1", "BEL2", "WM", "CH1", "CH2", and "ST". However, in reality, the patterns corresponding to these character strings are arranged. For example, "R7" is a red "7" pattern, "B7" is a blue "7" pattern, "BAR" is a "BAR" pattern, "BEL1" is a "bell" pattern, and "REP". The patterns of "Replay" are arranged. The plurality of types of symbols are not limited to the symbols as long as they can be distinguished from other symbols, and may be any pattern, symbols, numbers, or the like. Since "BEL1" and "BEL2" are composed of patterns having similar appearances, they are also collectively referred to as "BEL". Similarly, "CH1" and "CH2" are also collectively referred to as "CH" because they are composed of patterns having similar appearances.

In FIG. 3, symbol numbers 0 to 19 are shown at the left end thereof, corresponding to a symbol arrangement area in which symbols are arranged on each of the reels 11L to 11R. The symbol numbers 0 to 19 are numbers for specifying which symbol arrangement region is the symbol in each of the reels 11L to 11R of the present embodiment.

In the case of the present embodiment, for example, a reel tape on which the symbols from the symbol numbers 0 to 19 are printed is attached to the peripheral surfaces of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, when the reels 11L to 11R rotate, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the display window 7 in a predetermined order such as symbol number ... 19 → 18 → 17 → ... 2 → 1 → 0 → 19 → 18 ... Can be made to.

In the slot machine 1 having the above configuration, first, a medal insertion into the medal insertion slot 25 or a bet switch 15 or the like is operated to set a specified number of medals required for starting one game. The rotation can be started, and when the start switch 19 is operated, the reels 11L to 11R are rotated to variably display the symbols and one game is started. In the present embodiment, "3" and "2" are defined as the specified number of gaming states other than the "bonus state", and the specified number of the "bonus state" will be described later according to the type of the bonus state. Is defined as either "3" or "2". That is, in the game state other than the "bonus state", the game can be played regardless of whether the bet number is "3" or "2", but in the "bonus state", the bet number is increased according to the type of the bonus state. The game can only be played with either "3" or "2". The specified number is not limited to this, and may be another value, or the same value may be set regardless of the gaming state.

After one game is started, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switches 21L to 21R while the reels are rotating, and the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R is stopped to end one game. do. The slot machine 1 newly grants a predetermined privilege to the player according to the symbol combination (display result, game result) when all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped rotating. Prescribed benefits include, for example, transition of the game state, automatic setting of the number of bets for the next game without using new medals, and withdrawal of a predetermined number of medals (or credit addition) to add value for the game. However, it is not limited to these.

Further, in the slot machine 1, the stop switch is used from the start of rotation of the reels 11L to 11R by the operation to the start switch 19 until the rotation speed of each of the reels 11L to 11R reaches the steady rotation speed (predetermined speed). With the operation to 21L to 21R as an opportunity, it is possible to execute a reel effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a pseudo game) in which a rotating reel is pseudo-stopped (the stop is also referred to as a pseudo-stop) and a symbol combination is displayed. .. Pseudo-games are based on the establishment of predetermined specific conditions such as the result of a role lottery, the number of games digested from the start or end of an advantageous state, a random number lottery, a transition of a game state, an AT winning or an additional winning, etc. Will be executed. In the simulated game, the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is started by the operation of the start switch 19 until the rotation speed of each of the reels 11L to 11R reaches the steady rotation speed (this stop is enabled, which will be described later). As long as it is performed in the above period), the pseudo game (operation of pseudo-stopping the symbol combination after the reel rotation) may be performed a plurality of times.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a main control board 63, a sub control board 73, a power supply unit 49, an external output board 90, and the like.

The main control board 63 is a board on which a main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted. The sub control board 73 is a board on which a sub CPU 71 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game is mounted. The power supply unit 49 uses electric power supplied from the outside to generate a power source for driving various electric components mounted on the slot machine 1. The external output board 90 is a board that outputs a signal according to the progress of the game to the outside of the slot machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, a data display for each machine, etc.).

The main CPU 61 includes a ROM 67 that stores a game control program for controlling the progress of the game, and a RAM 65 that temporarily stores data related to the game, and is realized by executing the game control program stored in the ROM 67. It has various functions to be performed and various functions realized by controlling the hardware.

The main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes a game control program stored in the ROM 67, and is transmitted from a switch (operation means) or a sensor (detection means) connected to the main control board 63. Processes related to the progress of the game based on the signal. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1. The errors include, for example, a selector error detected by the charging sensor 53 for a predetermined time or longer, a full tank error in which the hopper container 42 is detected by the full tank sensor 58 to be full, and a hopper motor 57 being driven. Nevertheless, it includes a medal out error that has not been detected by the payout sensor 54 for a predetermined time or longer.

The switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 include the input sensor 53, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, the door sensor 20, the stop switches 21L to 21R, and the checkout switch 23, as shown in FIG. , Reset switch 52, change processing start switch 56, position sensors 55L to 55R, payout sensor 54, full tank sensor 58, and the like.

Further, the main CPU 61 performs processing related to the progress of the game to drive and control the devices connected to the main control board 63. The devices connected to the main control board 63 include a switching solenoid 51, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, a notification display 60, an advantageous period notification lamp 80, and reel motors 14L to 14R, as shown in FIG. , Hopper motor 57, and various LEDs. Further, a display composed of a 7-segment LED is mounted on the main control board 63. On the main control board 63, the ratio of staying in the advantageous period for the entire game period, the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out to the total number of payouts, the bonus winning to the end of the bonus for the total number of games, The ratio of the number of games played, such as the number of medals, and the ratio of the total number of medals paid out by the navigation effect (instruction) during the advantageous period to the total number of medals paid out (for example, the number of medals paid out). It is equipped with a display that displays items such as (also called object ratio). It should be noted that the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the accessory state ratio, the indicated accessory ratio, etc. are not limited to those displayed on the display mounted on the main control board 63, but are provided separately. It may be displayed on a display (for example, a payout display 46 or the like). In this case, for example, when the reset switch 52 is operated, the main CPU 61 may display the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the accessory state ratio, the indicated accessory ratio, and the like on the display. good.

The main control board 63 transmits various commands to the sub control board 73 according to the progress of the game. The sub control board 73 controls the effect based on the command from the main control board 63. On the other hand, a command cannot be sent from the sub control board 73 to the main control board 63. The command is transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 in only one direction.

The sub CPU 71 mounted on the sub control board 73 includes a ROM 77 for storing an effect control program for controlling the effect and a RAM 75 for temporarily storing data related to the effect, and the effect control stored in the ROM 77. It has various functions realized by executing a program and various functions realized by controlling hardware.

The sub CPU 71 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes an effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on a command from the main control board 63, and determines the effect content according to the progress of the game. Etc., and based on the result, the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 are driven and controlled to produce an effect. The devices connected to the sub control board 73 include speakers 31L and 31R, a liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, an effect operation unit 81, a chance switch 81F, a game identification lamp 82, and the like, as shown in FIG. Is included. The liquid crystal display 27 includes a display control unit that executes display processing for displaying an image in a display area. The display control unit executes a display process based on a command for display control from the sub control board 73, and displays a predetermined image in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. Further, the display control unit can also send a command to the sub control board 73 according to the display content. The sub-control board 73 transmits commands corresponding to the speakers 31L, 31R, various lamps, LEDs, and the like based on commands from the display control unit, thereby producing a sound or light corresponding to the image displayed in the display area. To execute. The various lamps / LEDs controlled by the sub CPU 71 include LEDs mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to the various switches. The sub CPU 71 can illuminate the operation unit by controlling the LED or the like so that the power consumption corresponds to the controlled mode, depending on whether or not the eco mode is used.

The effect operation unit 81 includes a determination switch 81a for determination, a left selection switch 81b for selection, a right selection switch 81c, an upper selection switch 81d, and a lower selection switch 81e (collectively referred to as up / down / left / right switches). Is provided. The sub CPU 71 executes a promotion effect that prompts an operation to the chance switch 81F when executing or developing a predetermined effect, and executes or develops a predetermined effect by operating the chance switch 81F. Control to make it. Further, the sub CPU 71 is in a state where the effect mode can be selected from among a plurality of types of effect modes having different types of effects (characters and backgrounds) to be executed by the liquid crystal display 27 or the like (during the effect mode selection screen display). In, one of the effect modes is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches, and the selected effect mode is set by operating the determination switch 81a.

Further, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the administrator menu state by operating the determination switch 81a when the change processing start switch 56 is operated to shift to the setting change processing, and displays the administrator menu screen on the liquid crystal display. It can be displayed on the vessel 27. On the administrator menu screen, "date and time setting", "setting change history" can be displayed, "mobile phone interlocking service ON / OFF setting", "eco mode setting" and the like can be performed. The eco-mode is a mode in which the power consumed by the production execution by the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 is saved more than usual. When the eco mode is set, for example, the control to lower the brightness of the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, the control to shorten the driving time or the lighting time, and the speaker 31L, 31R output from the normal time. Control to lower the volume is performed.

The sub CPU 71 does not rotate any of the reels 11L to 11R, and a specific effect generated according to the progress of the game (for example, continuous effect over a plurality of games, a chance button for prompting an operation to the chance switch 81F). The player is operated by operating the determination switch 81a when the determination switch 81a is not executed during the production, the pseudo game, after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and before the transition to the main game, etc.). The player's menu screen is made displayable on the liquid crystal display 27 by shifting to the menu state.

Further, on the player menu screen, a mobile interlocking service for confirming a role history such as the number of times a prize is generated and the probability of occurrence of a prize and accumulating a player's game history according to an operation to the effect operation unit 81. (Hereafter, it is also referred to as mobile interlocking), the volume setting output from the speakers 31L and 31R, the brightness adjustment of the liquid crystal display 27, and the like can be performed. The eco-mode setting will be described with reference to an example in which the eco-mode can be set in the administrator menu state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the eco-mode setting may be set in the player menu state.

The sub CPU 71 selects an item or a target to be displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches in the administrator menu state and the player menu state, and responds to the selected item or target by operating the determination switch 81a. Execute the processing. It should be noted that the sub CPU 71 may shift to the player menu state by operating the determination switch 81a even when a specific effect is being executed. In this case, the sub CPU 71 draws an image of a specific effect on a specific layer, and by operating the determination switch 81a, the player menu screen in the player menu state in the layer having a higher priority than the specific layer. By drawing the image of, the player menu screen may be displayed with priority. While the player menu screen is being displayed, the specific effect on the specific layer may be continuously executed, or the specific effect on the specific layer may be temporarily terminated.

Further, when the specific effect is continuously executed on the specific layer while the player menu screen is displayed and the effect is a continuous effect without a chance button effect for prompting the operation of the chance switch 81F, the effect is continuous. The player menu screen can be displayed by operating the decision switch 81a, while the player menu screen is displayed even if the decision switch 81a is operated when the effect is a chance button effect that prompts the operation to the chance switch 81F. You may not do it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the switch for developing the chance button effect from being operated while the player menu screen is being displayed and unintentionally developing the effect.

Further, the sub CPU 71 encourages operation of a specific effect (for example, continuous effect over a plurality of games, chance switch 81F) that is not rotated in any of the reels 11L to 11R and is generated according to the progress of the game. Chance button effect, during a pseudo game, after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, until the transition to the main game, etc.) is not executed, and any operation is detected. In a state where a predetermined time has passed (hereinafter, also referred to as a standby state or a game waiting state), a predetermined demo effect is executed. There are multiple types of demo production. The sub CPU 71 executes a type of demo effect according to a symbol (display result) that is stopped when controlled during the game standby. Further, when an operation (for example, an operation for setting a bet number) is detected during the execution of the demo effect, the return effect can be executed. The sub CPU 71 executes the return effect according to the time from the start of the demo effect to the detection of the operation. Both the demo effect and the return effect are effects performed by displaying a predetermined demo screen and a return screen on the liquid crystal display 27.

Further, the sub CPU 71 executes a promotion effect for prompting an operation to the chance switch 81F when executing or developing a predetermined effect, and executes a predetermined effect by operating the chance switch 81F. Or control to develop. Further, the sub CPU 71 is in a state where the effect mode can be selected from among a plurality of types of effect modes having different types of effects (characters and backgrounds) to be executed by the liquid crystal display 27 or the like (during the effect mode selection screen display). In, one of the effect modes is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81, and the selected effect mode is set by operating the determination switch 81a.

<Game control processing>
The main CPU 61 performs a game control process for controlling the progress of the game based on the game control program stored in the ROM 67. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game control process.

The main CPU 61 is for setting the number of bets according to the detection signal from the input sensor 53, the operation signal from the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17, the re-game flag set at the time of winning the re-game combination, and the like. Performs the bet number setting process. In the bet number setting process, the bet number setting command is output when the bet number is set. Further, in the bet number setting process, a drive signal for driving the hopper motor 57 is output based on the operation signal from the settlement switch 23, and the number of medals corresponding to the credit amount or the set bet number is paid out. The settlement process is performed.

In step S01 in the game control process, it is determined whether or not the set number of bets has reached the specified number. When it is not determined in step S01 that the number of bets has reached the specified number, the process of step S01 is repeated. When it is determined in step S01 that the number of bets has reached the specified number, the rotation startable state (validation) for effectively accepting the operation to the start switch 19 is set, and the operation to the start switch 19 is detected in step S02. It is determined whether or not the start lever has been activated, that is, whether or not the start lever has been activated. When it is not determined in step S02 that the start lever has been operated, the process of step S02 is repeated. When it is determined in step S02 that the start lever has been operated, the process proceeds to the internal lottery process in step S03. When shifting to the internal lottery process, a bet command that can specify the actually set number of bets (number of medals) is output. As a result, it is possible to specify the number of medals for which the bet number is set for one game even on the sub control board 73 side.

In the internal lottery process of step S03, a random number value for winning combination lottery is extracted from a random number circuit that updates the random number value within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and is predetermined based on the extracted value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted value). A winning combination lottery is held to determine whether or not to win one of the plurality of types of winning combinations. In the winning combination lottery, a winning combination lottery table in which the winning probability can be specified for each winning combination group subject to the winning combination lottery shown in FIG. 9 is referred to. The winning combination lottery table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 67.

As the types of roles, a bonus role, a replaying role, and a small role are provided. The bonus role is a transition role that accompanies the transition to a bonus state in which the probability of winning a small role is high. The replay combination (hereinafter, also referred to as replay) is a combination that sets the above-mentioned replay flag when a prize is won. In the bet number setting process, when the re-game flag is set, the specified number of games (this time games) to be started next (from now) is set without using new medals (or credits) owned by the player. It is a role to automatically set the corresponding bet number as the bet number of the next game. A small role is a role that involves paying out a predetermined number of medals (or adding credits).

As the bonus role, for example, there are a plurality of types of roles whose role names are "RBB role 1" to "RBB role 5" (hereinafter collectively referred to as bonus role or "RBB role"), and "SB role". It is provided. Of "RBB role 1" to "RBB role 5", "RBB role 1" to "RBB role 3" and "SB role" can be won or won in a game in which "3" is set as the bet number. Become. On the other hand, "RBB combination 4" and "RBB combination 5" can be won or won in a game in which "2" is set as the bet number. For each of the symbol combinations (combinations that win a prize) of "RBB combination 1" to "RBB combination 5", for example, combinations consisting of symbols such as "B7", "R7", and "BAR" are predetermined. When a prize is won in the RBB role, it is controlled to a bonus state. The bonus state ends with a game in which the number of medals paid out exceeds the number of medals corresponding to the winning bonus combination (for example, RBB1 to RBB3: 36, RBB4, 5: 5). Further, the symbol combination of the "SB role" includes, for example, a combination including "BEL", "CH", and other symbols constituting a small role and a re-game combination described later (for example, a game at first glance that the game is stopped). Combinations of loose stitches that are difficult for a person to grasp, etc.) are predetermined. The symbol combination of the "SB combination" may be a combination consisting of symbols such as "B7", "R7", and "BAR". When the SB role is won, only the next one game is controlled to the single bonus state.

Also, as the re-game role, for example, the role name is "normal RP role", "R7 matching RP role", "B7 matching RP role", "BAR matching RP role", "BAR tempai RP role" (hereinafter, Collectively, there are multiple types of roles called "RP roles"). Each of the symbol combinations (combinations that win a prize) of the replaying combination including these is predetermined to be a combination consisting of symbols such as "REP", "BEL", "B7", and "R7". For example, when the symbol combination of the "normal RP combination" is stopped on the winning line NL, the "REP" is stopped on any line (for example, a middle line (middle, middle, middle), etc.). Further, when the symbol combination of "R7 matching RP combination" is stopped on the winning line NL, "R7" is stopped on any line. Further, when each symbol combination of "B7 matching RP combination" and "BAR matching RP combination" is stopped on the winning line NL, the corresponding "B7" and "BAR" are stopped on any of the lines. Also, when the symbol combination of "BAR Tempai RP role" is stopped on the winning line NL, "BAR" is tempted and stopped at any two places on the left middle, middle right, left and right on any line. To.

As the small role, for example, there are a plurality of types of roles whose role names are "correct AT role", "one piece role", "watermelon role 1", "watermelon role 2", and "cherry role". When the symbol combination (combination that becomes a winning combination) of the "correct answer AT combination" is stopped on the winning line NL, the "BEL" is stopped on one of the lines. "Watermelon role 1" and "watermelon role 2" are also collectively referred to as "WM role". When the symbol combination of the "WM combination" is stopped on the winning line NL, the "WM" may be stopped on any of the lines. When the symbol combination of the "cherry role" is stopped on the winning line NL, "CH" may be stopped on any of the lines. Similarly, for other small roles, combinations consisting of symbols such as "REP", "BEL", "WM", "CH", "B7", and "R7" are predetermined. When a small winning combination is won, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the small winning combination. For example, the number of payouts for the "correct AT combination" is set to "10". The number of "watermelon role 1" and "watermelon role 2" to be paid out is set to "3". The number of payouts for the "one-card role" and "cherry role" is set to "1". For this reason, the "single role" and "cherry role" are collectively referred to as the single role. Similarly, for other small roles, the number of payouts when winning a prize is predetermined. Granting such medals (game value used for the progress of the game) is not performed in the pseudo game, but is performed in the main game.

In the internal lottery process, a winning combination lottery is performed for each of a plurality of types of winning combination groups composed of predetermined combinations. The winning combination group in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9.

As the winning combination group including the bonus combination, "RBB1" to "RBB5" and "SB" are provided. "RBB1" to "RBB5" are winning combination groups each consisting of one bonus combination (one of the above-mentioned "RBB roles 1 to 5"), and "SB" is from "SB role". It is a winning combination group. The winning combination group including the bonus combination may include not only the bonus combination but also the winning combination group that is elected at the same time as other roles (for example, watermelon role, cherry role, etc.).

As the winning combination group of the re-game combination, "MRP1", "NRP1" to "NRP3" are provided. "MRP1" "NRP1" to "NRP3" are "normal RP role", "R7 matching RP role", "B7 matching RP role", "BAR matching RP role", "BAR tempai RP role", etc., respectively. It is a winning combination group composed of a predetermined combination of combinations among a plurality of types of replaying combinations including. The combination of the combinations constituting each of "MRP1", "NRP1" to "NRP3" is defined to be different from the combination of the combinations constituting the winning combination group of the other replaying combination. For example, "MRP1" and "NRP3" both include a "normal RP combination", while the two include different replay combinations, so that the combination of the combinations constituting each is different. In addition, "NRP1" and "NRP2" both include "normal RP role", "R7 matching RP role", "B7 matching RP role", "BAR matching RP role", and "BAR tempai RP role", while both By including different replaying combinations in, the combination of the combinations constituting each is defined to be different.

The winning combination groups for small roles include "A_LC1" to "A_RC2", "B_LC1" to "B_RC2", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", "BE", and "Be". "ALL1" and "ALL2" are provided. The winning combination group of these small roles is predetermined among a plurality of types of small roles including "correct AT role", "one piece role", "watermelon role 1", "watermelon role 2", "cherry role", etc. It is a winning combination group consisting of a combination of the winning combinations. "A_LC1" to "A_RC2", "B_LC1" to "B_RC2", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", "BE", "ALL1", and "ALL2" respectively. The combination of winning combinations is defined to be different from the combination of winning combinations of other small winning combination. For example, "A_LC1" to "A_RC2", "B_LC1" to "B_RC2", "BE", and "ALL2" both include "correct AT combination" and "single combination", but by including different small combinations. , The combinations of the combinations that make up each are defined to be different. "A_LC1" to "A_RC2" and "B_LC1" to "B_RC2" are also referred to as AT roles because they are the targets of navigation production during AT. Further, "CH" includes at least "cherry role". While "WM1" and "WM2" both include "watermelon role 1" and "watermelon role 2", they are defined so that the combination of the roles constituting the two is different by including different small roles.

Of these multiple types of winning combination groups, the winning combination group to be the target of the combination lottery is determined for each of the plurality of types of gaming states. Further, the determination value related to the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is determined according to the winning combination group, the controlled gaming state, and the set value.

As the game states that can be controlled in the slot machine 1, "RT0" in which none of the RBB combinations are won, "RT1" in which any of the RBB combinations 1 to RBB combination 3 is won, the RBB combination 4 and the RBB. "RT2" in which any of the roles 5 is won, "RBB1" to "RBB5" which are bonus states associated with the winning of each of the RBB roles 1 to RBB role 5, and "RBB1" which is a single bonus state associated with the winning of the SB role. SB "and the like are provided. "RT0" to "RT2" are also collectively referred to as a general gaming state. Further, the bonus states "RBB1" to "RBB5" are also collectively referred to as RBB.

In the game status column of FIG. 9, the winning combination group to be the target of the combination lottery is indicated by a circle in each of RT0 to RT2 when betting on 3 cards, RT0 to RT2 when betting on 2 cards, and RBB1 to 5 / SB. Winning role groups that are not subject to the role lottery are indicated by a cross. In particular, RBB1 to RBB3 and SB are subject to the winning combination lottery only when betting 3 cards during RT0, and RBB4 and 5 are subject to the winning combination lottery only when betting 2 cards during RT0. It has been decided.

In the internal lottery process, the judgment value (judgment value according to the set set value) of the winning combination group that is the target of the combination lottery in the current game state is read, and the value subtracted from the extraction value (update the extraction value). Performs a determination process to determine whether or not is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 0), and if it is not a smaller value (for example, when it is 0 or more), performs a determination process for the next winning combination group. Repeat the cycle.

When it is determined in the determination process for any of the winning combination groups that the value is smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that the winning combination group has been won, and the winning flag of the combination included in the winning combination group is determined. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 65, and the winning combination lottery is completed. Therefore, the probability of winning the winning combination group is "determined value of the winning combination group / 65536". It can be said that the winning combination group has a high winning probability because the larger the determination value read out in the winning combination lottery, the easier it is for the value to be smaller than the predetermined value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not smaller than the predetermined value even though the judgment process is performed for all the winning combination groups that are the targets of the winning combination lottery, no winning combination group has been won. Is determined to be. The internal lottery process ends the winning combination lottery when it is determined that one of the winning combination groups has been won, or when it is determined that no winning combination group has been won and it is "missing".

Here, the winning probability of the small winning combination of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" in the winning combination group and the winning probability of the lottery target combination in "SB" will be described. First, the winning probability of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" is determined so that the probability of winning is higher when the probability is RT0 to RT2 when betting three cards than when the probability is RT0 to RT2 when betting two cards. Is stipulated. More specifically, the winning probabilities of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" in RT0 to RT2 at the time of betting three cards are the payout rates during AT in which the navigation effect described later can be executed (for example, payout rate = (expected payout rate). The determination value is determined so that the probability that (number of sheets) / (number of sheets used for setting the number of bets) x 100) is 1 or more. On the other hand, the winning probability of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" in RT0 to RT2 at the time of betting two cards is the probability that the payout rate will be less than 1 even during the AT in which the navigation effect described later can be executed. As shown above, the judgment value is determined. The state where the payout rate is less than 1 can be rephrased as the state where the deducted number obtained by subtracting (the number used for setting the bet number) from (the expected number of payouts) is less than 0.

Further, in "SB", as shown in FIG. 9, "ALL1" and "ALL2" are defined as lottery target combinations. As will be described later, one medal is paid out in the game in which "ALL1" is won, and ten medals are paid out in the game in which "ALL2" is won. However, the determination value is set so that the winning probability of the lottery target combination in "SB" is higher in "ALL1" than in "ALL2". More specifically, the determination value is set so that the winning probability of each of "ALL1" and "ALL2" is the probability that the payout rate in "SB" is less than 1.

Returning to FIG. 5, after the internal lottery process in step S03 is performed, a process for outputting a winning type command capable of specifying the type of the winning combination group won in the winning combination lottery in step S04 to the sub control board 73. I do. For example, when the RBB role is won, a winning type command that can identify that one of the "RBB roles" is won is output, and when the RP role is won, one of the re-game roles is won. The winning type command that can specify is output, and when "A_LC1" to "A_RC2", "B_LC1" to "B_RC2", etc. are won, the winning type command that can specify that the AT combination has been won is output. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group.

In step S05, the push order buffer setting process is performed. FIG. 6A is a flowchart for explaining the push order buffer setting process. The RAM 65 is provided with a push order buffer for storing a value in which a mode (push order or the like) of a stop operation for the stop switches 21L to 21R is defined.

In step S31 in the push order buffer setting process, first, the value stored in the push order buffer is cleared, that is, updated to a value of "0". In step S32, it is determined whether or not the AT is in progress when the advantageous operation mode is notified. When it is not determined in step S32 that AT is in progress, the push order buffer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S32 that AT is in progress, a process of turning on the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is performed in step S33. When the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is already lit, the lighting is maintained.

In step S34, it is determined based on the winning flag and the like whether or not the AT combination, which is the winning combination group to be notified of the advantageous operation mode, has been won. When it is not determined in step S34 that the AT combination has been won, the push order buffer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34 that the AT combination has been won, the value specified (selected) according to the AT combination established in step S35 is stored (stored) in the push order buffer. When specifying the value in step S35, any value is specified from among the values for which the operation mode matching the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the established AT combination is defined. The value stored in the push order buffer is held until it is acquired at least in step S14 of FIG. 5, and is cleared at the time of executing step S31 in the next game.

FIG. 6B shows a value that can be stored in the push order buffer, a stop operation mode (operation-related information) defined in the value, a display content displayed on the notification display 60, and a liquid crystal display. The display content displayed on the display 27 is shown. As the display contents displayed on the notification display 60, "1" to "12" are exemplified in FIG. 6B. The display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 include circled numbers "1" to "3", "?", And "x", and the push order and correct answer for the left to left reels. -Information on incorrect answers, etc.-Information on the push order, correct answers, incorrect answers, etc. for the middle reel-Information on the push order, correct answers, incorrect answers, etc. for the right reel is shown.

For example, for the value "1", "1" is defined as the display content displayed on the notification display 60, and "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" is set as the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Is defined, and an operation mode (so-called one-choice advantageous operation mode) in which the left reel 11L is first stopped, the middle reel 11M is secondly stopped, and the right reel 11R is thirdly stopped is defined. Further, for the value "5", "5" is defined as the display content displayed on the notification display 60, and "2, 3.1" is set as the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Is defined, and an operation mode in which the right reel 11R is first stopped, the left reel 11L is secondly stopped, and the middle reel 11M is thirdly stopped is defined. Further, for the value "7", "7" is defined as the display content displayed on the notification display 60, and "1 ...?" Is displayed as the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Is defined, and the correct procedure is to stop the left reel 2L first, and it is not possible to specify whether the second stop is the middle reel 11M or the right reel 11R (so-called two-choice advantageous operation mode). )It is shown. Further, for the value "10", "10" is defined as the display content displayed on the notification display 60, and "x ...?" Is displayed as the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Is defined, the left reel 2L is not the first stop but an incorrect procedure, the first stop is either the middle reel 11M or the right reel 11R, and the second stop is any of the remaining reels. It is shown that it cannot be specified (so-called four-choice advantageous operation mode). The value "0" does not define the display content to be displayed on the notification display 60, the notification display 60 is in a non-display state, and the liquid crystal display 27 is optional. The term "arbitrary" means, for example, only when a winning combination group (replay) in which the result of the game is the same regardless of the mode of the player's stop operation is won, or when a pseudo game is being executed. It means that it is permissible to notify an image such as "replay" or an arbitrary pressing order on the display 27.

As an advantageous operation mode for winning the "correct AT combination" among the AT combinations, the left reel 11L is first stopped, then the middle reel 11M is stopped second, and finally the right reel 11R is stopped third. When the mode is defined as "A_LC1", in step S35, any one of "1", "7", "11", and "12", which is an appropriate value as an advantageous operation mode of "A_LC1", is specified. Then, the value is saved (stored) in the push order buffer. When specifying any value, the ratio changes based on the mode related to the payout rate during AT and specific parameters updated according to the progress of the game such as the net increase number of cards and the number of digested games during the advantageous period. It may be a thing or a thing having the same ratio. Further, when controlling so as not to notify the advantageous operation mode of the winning AT combination at a predetermined ratio in order to change the net increase number of medals during AT, specify any value including the value "0". You may do so. Further, it is not limited to the one in which any one of a plurality of values is specified from the type of the winning combination group, and even if it is defined so that one value is uniquely specified from the type of the winning combination group. good. For example, in the case of a gaming machine having only the above-mentioned advantageous operation mode which is the so-called one option, the value "1" may be specified when "A_LC1" is won during AT.

Returning to FIG. 5, in step S06, the first related process is performed as the AT system lottery process after the start lever. In the first related process of step S06, a process related to an advantageous period is performed. In the present embodiment, it becomes possible to control the advantageous period by satisfying the predetermined advantageous period transition condition in the normal period. The advantageous period includes an advantageous general, a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ), and an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT). The general advantage is the period during which the CZ transition lottery for whether or not to transition to CZ can be executed. CZ is a period during which an AT transition lottery for whether or not to transition an AT game to an executable AT can be executed. Advantageous general is a period during which a transition lottery (CZ transition lottery, AT transition lottery) for whether or not to shift to an AT in which a CZ or AT game can be executed can be executed. CZ is a period during which the AT transition lottery for whether or not to transition to AT can be executed. In the AT transition lottery, the rate at which the transition to AT is determined is higher in the CZ than in the advantageous general.

Advantageous general and CZ in the advantageous period are periods in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 during the period (for example, also referred to as a non-ball-out period during the advantageous period), whereas in AT, AT games are performed. As a result, it can be said that it is a period in which the payout rate during AT exceeds 1 (for example, it is also referred to as a ball ejection period during an advantageous period). In the advantageous period, the advantage is generally controlled first. Further, in the general advantage, the CZ can be controlled by winning in the CZ transition lottery performed by satisfying the predetermined CZ transition lottery conditions. Further, in the advantageous general and CZ, the AT can be controlled by winning in the AT transition lottery performed by satisfying the predetermined AT transition lottery conditions. Therefore, it can be said that the advantageous period is a period that can be controlled by AT. Further, it can be said that the AT during the advantageous period is an advantageous state for the player.

The predetermined advantageous period transition condition is a condition that is established based on the result of the winning combination lottery in the internal lottery process. FIG. 10A shows a winning combination group that satisfies the advantageous period transition condition. The conditions for shifting to the advantageous period are among "SB", "A_LC1" to "B_RC2", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", and "BE" in the winning combination group. It is established by winning one of them and is controlled during the advantageous period. In addition, the transition condition to the advantageous period is also satisfied by winning the winning combination group having a setting difference in the winning probability, and by winning the winning combination group having no setting difference in the winning probability. Also holds. Further, the condition for shifting to the advantageous period may be satisfied by winning a specific winning combination group that is uniformly defined regardless of the type of the state in which the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is controlled. .. "The winning probability in the winning combination lottery is uniformly determined regardless of the type of the controlled state" means that the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is uniformly determined in any state.

Further, for each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery conditions and the predetermined AT transition lottery conditions, for example, the winning combination groups (SB, “A_LC1” to “B_RC2”, “CH”, “WM1”, “WM1” shown in FIG. It is established by winning any of "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", "BE"). When the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 10B, the player wins the AT transition lottery with the AT winning probability predetermined according to the type of the winning combination group. Therefore, for example, when "SB" is won in the normal period, it is controlled in the advantageous period by satisfying the advantageous transition condition, the CZ transition lottery condition and the AT transition lottery condition are satisfied, and the lottery is performed, and the AT transition lottery is performed. If you win in, it may be controlled by AT during the advantageous period. In addition, although the example in which the advantageous period transition condition, the CZ transition lottery condition, and the AT transition lottery condition are exactly the same conditions is shown, the conditions may be completely different, and some of them are common. It may include conditions.

The conditions for ending the advantageous period are the first condition that is established when the advantageous period counter = 1500 indicating that the upper limit of the advantageous period (for example, the maximum number of games: 1500) has been reached, and the number of bets in the advantageous period. The lowest cumulative number of accumulated differences based on the number of medals and the number of medals awarded is set to 0 as the base point, and the current cumulative number from that base point reaches the upper limit of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit cumulative number: 2400). The second condition that is satisfied by doing so is included. The cumulative number is specified according to the value of the cumulative number counter that is updated during the advantageous period. Both the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. It should be noted that the upper limit number of games 1500, which is the first condition, and the upper limit cumulative number 2400, which is the second condition, do not always reach the numerical values, and the advantageous period is a numerical value that does not exceed these conditions. It may be terminated, for example, it may be terminated at around 1450 under the first condition, or at around 2300 under the second condition.

As a condition for ending the advantageous period, further, the number of AT games and the number of AT navigations have ended, and the game is digested a predetermined number of times without being transferred to CZ or AT during the advantageous general after the end of AT. It also includes a third condition that is satisfied by digesting the game a predetermined number of times without being transferred to the AT during the CZ after the AT is completed. In the following, the conditions for ending the advantageous period (general advantage, CZ or AT) are collectively referred to as "conditions for ending the advantageous period (condition for ending the advantageous period)". The conditions for terminating the advantageous period are not limited to those exemplified in this embodiment as long as they include at least the first condition and the second condition, and conditions that can be satisfied by other predetermined events. May be.

In the first related process, during the advantageous period, the advantageous period may end with the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition (for example, winning a predetermined winning combination group), and the end of the game this time. It is determined whether or not the situation (for example, the maximum number of games (1500) or the maximum cumulative number (2400) of the advantageous period has been reached by this game), and if the situation can be satisfied, the condition may be satisfied. Perform a production that incites something. For example, the main CPU 61 drives and controls the payout display 46, the notification display 60, and the like in such a manner that all segments are blinked.

In step S07, a process for outputting a test signal for smoothly performing a test or the like related to the gaming machine to the outside via the external output device 90 is performed. The test signal includes information that can specify the type of winning combination, the optimum pressing order or the optimum pressing position (stop operation timing, etc.) corresponding to the winning combination.

In step S08, a command is transmitted to the sub-control board 73. The command output in step S08 includes a command for specifying information related to the advantageous period and AT, a push order command including information for specifying a value stored in the push order buffer, and the like. As a result, even on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the operation mode, which is the display content (see FIG. 6B) corresponding to the value stored in the push order buffer, on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. Become. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the situation where the advantageous period can end with the end of this game, the main CPU 61 specifies a condition that may be satisfied. Outputs possible condition-related commands to the sub-control board 73. Thereby, for example, the liquid crystal display 27 can notify the possibility that each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the condition for terminating the advantageous period is satisfied. As described above, the first related process executes the process according to whether or not the conditions related to the advantageous period can be satisfied. Regarding the process for actually shifting to the advantageous period and the process for determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied and ending the advantageous period, for example, the process of step S19 or the like described later is performed. Will be.

In step S09, it is determined whether the game is in a bonus such as RBB or is a game at the time of betting two cards. When it is determined in step S09 that the bonus is in progress, or when it is determined that the game is a two-card betting game, the process proceeds to step S12. When it is not determined in step S09 that the game is in the bonus and it is not determined that the game is a two-card bet, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in step S10 and the pseudo game is executed. Is determined. If it is not determined in step S10 that it is time to execute the pseudo game, the process proceeds to step S12. When it is determined in step S10 that the pseudo game is to be executed, the pseudo game process is performed in step S11.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart for explaining the pseudo game process. In step S41, a pseudo game start command is transmitted to the sub control board 73. Thereby, it can be specified that the pseudo game is started on the sub control board 73 side. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, for example, a game identification lamp 82, a liquid crystal display 27, or the like can be used to perform pseudo game identification notification that makes it possible to specify that a pseudo game is in progress. Further, on the sub-control board 73 side, for example, regardless of whether the sub-control board 73 is in the advantageous period or in the AT, the mode of the stop operation (for example, the push order, the stop timing, the target symbol, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display during the simulated game. It can be displayed on the display 27. In step S42, the pseudo game reel activation process is performed. In the pseudo game reel start processing, in order to start the pseudo game, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate the reels 11L to 11R.

In step S43, the vibration control flag is set. The vibration control flag is a flag for performing a process of slightly vibrating a reel that is pseudo-stopped in response to an operation to a stop switch during a simulated game at regular time intervals (for example, 500 msec). In step S44, a pseudo stop activation process is performed. In the pseudo stop activation process, for example, after the rotation speeds of the reels 11L to 11R started by the pseudo game reel start process in step S42 reach a constant speed (for example, the excitation pattern of the reel motors 14L to 14R has a constant speed). After the excitation pattern becomes It is in a state of being effectively accepted (pseudo stop enabled). Further, in the pseudo stop activation process, the LED (also referred to as a stoptable lamp) mounted inside the operation unit of each of the stop switches 21L to 21R is displayed in a pseudo mode (for example, red) in accordance with the pseudo stop activation process. The process of turning on is performed. The constant speed for which the pseudo stop is enabled in the pseudo stop activation process may be, for example, the same speed as the predetermined speed which is the above-mentioned steady rotation speed, or a speed slower than the predetermined speed or a predetermined speed. The speed may be faster than the speed. Further, the constant speed for enabling the pseudo stop is not defined as one speed like the steady rotation speed, and for example, one of the multiple speeds is specified for each pseudo game (that is, the pseudo stop). It may be different for each game).

In step S45, the pseudo game reel stop processing is performed. In the pseudo game reel stop process, a process of ending the rotation of the reel and performing a pseudo stop is performed by operating the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. In the pseudo game reel stop process, the reel is pseudo-stopped at a position corresponding to the operation mode (for example, push order, operation timing, etc.) to the stop switch (similar to the reel stop process in step S16 described later). The reel may be pseudo-stopped at a predetermined position, a predetermined position, etc. regardless of the operation mode (including the operation timing, push order, presence / absence of operation, etc.) of the stop switch. May be good. When the position to be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, that is, the symbol to be pseudo-stopped is predetermined or predetermined, the main control board 63 is a predetermined symbol or a predetermined symbol. Information that can identify the symbol to be pseudo-stopped (pseudo-stop scheduled symbol command) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 73 side. On the sub-control board 73 side, the notification content such as the navigation effect to be notified during the pseudo game may be determined based on the pseudo stop schedule symbol command (for example, step S121 in FIG. 15 described later). Although the main control board 63 has described an example of transmitting a pseudo-stop schedule symbol command capable of specifying a symbol scheduled to be pseudo-stopped, as a predetermined case, when a pseudo game occurs, a specific symbol combination is described. Is always pseudo-stopped, on the sub-control board 73 side, the notification content corresponding to the specific symbol combination is specified based on the pseudo-game start command transmitted in step S41 (for example, step S121 in FIG. 15 described later). ) May be done.

Further, in the pseudo game reel stop processing, when the reel is pseudo-stopped in response to an operation to the stop switch, information that can identify the pseudo-stopped reel and the symbols arranged on the reel (for example,). Pseudo-stop symbol specification command, etc.) and information that can specify the symbol combination that is pseudo-stopped when all reels are pseudo-stopped (for example, pseudo-stop symbol combination specification command, etc.) on the sub-control board 73 side. It may be output to. Further, on the sub-control board 73 side, an effect corresponding to the pseudo-stopped symbol may be performed based on the pseudo-stop symbol specifying command or the pseudo-stop symbol specifying command.

Further, while the vibration control flag is set, an excitation signal for changing the excitation phase is output to the reel motor that controls the reel that is pseudo-stopped at regular time intervals (for example, 500 msec). As a result, the reel that is pseudo-stopped during the simulated game can be slightly vibrated at regular time intervals (for example, 500 msec).

In the case of pseudo-stopping in response to an operation on the stop switch, etc., in the pseudo-game reel stop processing during the pseudo-game, after the operation is effectively accepted, the symbol located on the winning line NL of the reel corresponding to the operation is started. A process is performed in which any of the symbols arranged within the predetermined retractable range (stop upper limit range) and beyond the retractable range is drawn into the winning line NL to pseudo-stop the reel. The retractable range is the range up to 4 symbols as described later. The symbols arranged beyond the retractable range are symbols arranged up to a predetermined number of symbols exceeding 4. The predetermined number is the number of symbols for one lap (20 symbols) arranged on the reel, the number of symbols for two laps (40 symbols) that can stop any symbol after one rotation, 30 and the like. It may be any number of symbols. Therefore, in the pseudo-game reel stop processing during the pseudo-game, the symbols arranged from the symbols on the winning line NL to the four symbols ahead when operated and the symbols arranged five or more ahead of the four symbols are arranged. It is possible to pseudo-stop the symbol on the winning line NL.

In step S46, it is determined whether or not all the reels have been pseudo-stopped. When it is not determined in step S46 that all the reels are pseudo-stopped, in step S48, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes or the like) has elapsed since the pseudo game was started. When it is determined in step S48 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo game, the spinning reel is forcibly stopped in step S49, and the process proceeds to step S50. When the pseudo stop is forcibly stopped, the pseudo stop is performed in the optimum manner for the player. The optimum mode may be, for example, a mode of a stop operation according to a value stored in the push order buffer, and a push order notified on the sub-control board 73 side during a simulated game as described later. When determining the above on the main control board 63 side, the push order or the like may be used.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in step S48 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo game was started, it is determined in step S47 whether or not a pseudo cancel operation for canceling the pseudo game is performed. The pseudo-cancel operation is, for example, an operation on the settlement switch 23. The pseudo-cancel operation may be an operation on the operation means that also accepts an operation for causing another function such as the settlement switch 23, or an operation means dedicated to the pseudo-cancel. It may be an operation.

When it is determined in step S47 that the pseudo cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S51. When it is determined that the pseudo cancel operation has been performed, the process may proceed to step S49. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the pseudo cancel operation has been performed in step S47, the process proceeds to step S45.

When it is determined in step S46 that all reels are pseudo-stopped, or after step S49 is performed, it is determined in step S50 whether or not the start lever has been operated. When it is not determined that the start lever has been operated, the process of step S50 is repeated. When it is determined that the start lever has been operated, a pseudo game end command is transmitted to the sub control board 73 in step S51. As a result, it is possible to specify that the pseudo game has ended on the sub control board 73 side. It is possible to erase the mode of the stop operation (for example, push order, stop timing, target symbol, etc.).

When the pseudo game is performed a plurality of times by satisfying the specific condition, when it is determined in step S50 that the start lever has been activated, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game will be performed again next time, and the next time as well. When the pseudo game is performed, the process proceeds to step S42, and when the pseudo game ends, the process proceeds to step S51. Further, the number of times to perform the pseudo game may be determined when the specific condition is satisfied, and in the case where it is determined in advance to perform the pseudo game a plurality of times in this way, step S50. When it is determined that the start lever has been activated, it is determined whether or not there is an undigested pseudo-game, and if there is still an undigested pseudo-game, the process proceeds to step S42, and the undigested pseudo-game is performed. If not, the process proceeds to step S51.

Except for the case where the start lever is determined to have been activated in step S50, the pseudo game is completed, random delay processing is performed, and then the reel is rotated to rotate the reel, not the pseudo game, but the game value and benefits. It will be shifted to the game for stopping the symbol combination related to the grant of. In the pseudo-game, no game value or privilege is given regardless of the combination of symbols that have been pseudo-stopped. The game for stopping the symbol combination related to the granting of the game value and the privilege, not the pseudo game, is called the main game (or the normal game) to distinguish it from the pseudo game. In the main game, the main stop is possible, and in the pseudo game, the pseudo stop is possible.

Even when it is not determined in step S50 that the start lever has been activated, the start lever is activated when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo game was started (reel rotation started). It is possible to shift to the next process (for example, step S51, step S42 depending on the number of pseudo games, etc.).

The vibration control flag set in step S43 is maintained thereafter, and is reset when the rotation of all reels is started after the random delay as described later. Therefore, the micro-vibration generated at regular time intervals with respect to the reels that are pseudo-stopped continues even after the start of the random delay processing, and continues until the rotation of all the reels starts after the random delay processing.

Returning to FIG. 5, in step S12, it is determined whether or not the wait time has elapsed. The wait time is such that the period until the stop switch of the next game becomes effective for stopping is longer than a certain period. The wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds, and the measurement may be started after the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R is started in the previous game. If it is not determined in step S12 that the wait time has elapsed, the process of step S12 is repeated.

When it is determined in step S12 that the wait time has elapsed, it is determined in step S13 whether or not "0" is stored as the value of the push order buffer. The case where the value of the push order buffer is "0" is, for example, a case where the process of step S35 is not performed because the AT is not performed after the value of the push order buffer is cleared in step S31 of FIG. 6 (a). When it is determined in step S13 that "0" is stored as the value of the push order buffer, the process proceeds to step S15. As a result, the mode of the stop operation is not notified on the notification display 60, and the display state is hidden. On the other hand, when it is not determined in step S13 that "0" is stored as the value of the push order buffer, the value of the push order buffer is acquired in step S14, and the display content corresponding to the value is displayed by the player. The stop operation information that makes it possible to specify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the user is displayed on the notification display 60. As a result, the advantageous operation mode can be notified in the notification display 60. In step S14, the process of notifying the advantageous operation mode by the notification display 60 is performed after the process for performing the pseudo game (step S11 or the like) is completed even when the pseudo game occurs. Therefore, even if a value other than "0" is stored as the value of the push order buffer, the advantageous operation mode is not notified on the notification display 60 during the simulated game.

In step S15, the reel start processing is performed. FIG. 8 is a flowchart for explaining the reel starting process. In step S61, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the pseudo-game, or whether or not it is after the power failure is restored that occurred during the pseudo-game. When it is not determined whether it is after the end of the pseudo game or after the power failure is restored during the pseudo game, the process proceeds to step S63. When it is determined that it is after the end of the pseudo game, or when it is determined that it is after the power failure is restored that occurred during the pseudo game, the random delay wait process is performed in step S62. The random delay wait process is, for example, a process for determining a delay time for delaying the rotation start timing of the reel to be rotated and waiting until the delay time elapses. The delay time is randomly determined for each random delay wait process, for example, from the range of 5.96 msec to 750.96 msec by random number lottery. In the random delay wait process, the process waits until the determined delay time elapses, and when it is determined that the delay time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next process (step S63 in the case of step S62). In step S63, the left reel start processing for rotating the left reel 11L is performed by driving and controlling the reel motor 14L. As a result, when neither after the pseudo game ends nor after the power failure recovery that occurred during the pseudo game, the rotation of the left reel 11L is immediately started, whereas the power failure that occurs after the pseudo game ends or during the pseudo game. After the return, the rotation of the left reel 11L is started after a random delay.

In step S64, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the pseudo game, or whether or not it is after the power failure is restored that occurred during the pseudo game. When it is not determined whether it is after the end of the pseudo game or after the power failure is restored during the pseudo game, the process proceeds to step S66. When it is determined that it is after the end of the pseudo game, or when it is determined that it is after the power failure recovery that occurred during the pseudo game, the random delay wait process is performed in step S65. In step S66, the middle reel start processing is performed by driving and controlling the reel motor 14C to rotate the middle reel 11M. As a result, when neither after the pseudo game ends nor after the power failure recovery that occurred during the pseudo game, the rotation of the middle reel 11M is immediately started, whereas the power failure that occurs after the pseudo game ends or during the pseudo game. After the return, the rotation of the middle reel 11M is started after a random delay.

In step S67, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the pseudo-game, or whether or not it is after the power failure is restored that occurred during the pseudo-game. When it is not determined whether it is after the end of the pseudo game or after the power failure is restored during the pseudo game, the process proceeds to step S69. When it is determined that it is after the end of the pseudo game, or when it is determined that it is after the power failure is restored that occurred during the pseudo game, the random delay wait process is performed in step S68. In step S69, the reel motor 14R is driven and controlled to rotate the right reel 11R. As a result, the rotation of the right reel 11R is immediately started when neither after the end of the pseudo game nor after the power interruption that occurred during the pseudo game is restored, whereas the electric power that occurs after the end of the pseudo game or during the pseudo game. After the return, the rotation of the right reel 11R is started after a random delay. Until the rotation of the reel is started in step S63, step S66, and step S68, the vibration control flag is set, so that slight vibration is generated at regular time intervals. The vibration control flag is reset in step S70 when the rotation of all reels is started. Further, when the rotation of all the reels is started, the reel rotation start command is transmitted to the sub control board 73. The processes shown in steps S61 to S69 in FIG. 8 are also collectively referred to as random delay processes.

In step S71, the rotation speed of each of the reels 11L to 11R reaches a steady rotation speed (for example, after the excitation pattern of the reel motors 14L to 14R becomes an excitation pattern having a predetermined speed), and each of the reels 11L to 11R By detecting the reference position by each of the position sensors 55L to 55R, it is determined whether or not the stop operation is possible. When it is not determined in step S71 that the stop operation is possible, the process of step S71 is repeated. When it is determined in step S71 that the stop operation is possible, the reel stop activation process is performed in step S72. In the reel stop activation process, a state in which the stop operation to the stop switches 21L to 21R (the stop operation in the main game is also referred to as the main stop operation and the stop in the main game is also referred to as the main stop) is effectively accepted (main stop activation). At the same time, a process is performed in which an LED (also referred to as a stoptable lamp) mounted inside each operation unit of the stop switches 21L to 21R is turned on in a normal mode (for example, blue). The main stop activation is a state in which the stop operation in the main game is effectively accepted, whereas the pseudo stop activation in the pseudo game shown in step S44 is in a state in which the pseudo stop operation is effectively accepted. Is different from.

Returning to FIG. 5, in step S16, the reel stop process is performed. In the reel stop processing, the rotation of the reel is terminated and stopped by operating the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. More specifically, in the reel stop processing, when the stop switch is operated in a state where the stop operation is possible, for example, a draw-in possible range (predetermined from the symbol located on the winning line NL of the reel corresponding to the stop switch) ( Any of the symbols arranged in the stop upper limit range) is drawn into the winning line NL to stop the reel. The retractable range is the range up to 4 symbols. Therefore, in the reel stop process during this game, the symbols arranged from the symbols on the winning line NL to the four symbols ahead can be stopped on the winning line NL when the stop operation is performed.

If any of the winning roles is won in the winning combination lottery, when the symbols that make up the winning combination can be drawn onto the winning line within the drawable range, the relevant symbols are drawn onto the winning line. Stop it. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, a symbol that is a combination of out-of-order symbols that does not win any winning combination is drawn onto the winning line and stopped. Therefore, when the stop switch is operated, if the symbol constituting the winning combination can be drawn onto the winning line NL within the drawable range, the symbol is pulled into the winning line NL. While it can be stopped, the symbol combination of the winning combination will not be stopped on the winning line NL.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, "when any of the winning roles is won in the winning combination lottery, the symbols constituting the winning winning combination can be drawn into the winning line within the drawable range. It is a thing. Here, since the role lottery is performed for each "winning combination group", the "winning combination" corresponds to any of the roles constituting the winning "winning combination group" in detail. It will be a thing.

In the reel stop process, the symbols within the retractable range can be stopped on the winning line NL, but the symbols outside the retractable range cannot be stopped on the winning line NL. For this reason, in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R, for a winning combination in which there is a place where the symbols constituting the winning combination do not exist within the drawable range, even if the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery, if the operation timing does not match, the winning line There may be a case (non-winning) in which the symbol constituting the winning combination cannot be drawn into the NL and the winning combination is missed.

Each of the symbols constituting the RBB combination (for example, symbols such as "B7", "R7", and "BAR") has a place that does not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels. For example, in the reel 11L, only two "B7" symbols are arranged, and when the stop switch 21L is stopped while the symbols of symbol numbers 3 to 12 are passing on the winning line NL, the "B7" symbol is operated. Cannot be stopped on the winning line NL. Therefore, even if the RBB combination is won, it may not be possible to draw the symbols constituting the bonus combination into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and there is a possibility that the RBB combination will be missed. Therefore, when one of the RBB combinations is won, the reel control for drawing in the winning bonus combination within the drawable range may be performed, but no combination may be won. Regarding the RBB combination, if the winning game cannot be won, the process of carrying over the winning flag of the bonus combination until the winning of the RBB combination is controlled by RT1 or RT2 which is the RBB internal winning state. Will be done.

The symbols constituting the CB combination (for example, symbols such as "BEL" and "CH") include symbols having locations that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels. For example, among the symbols constituting the CB combination, the middle symbol is composed of "CH1". In this case, in the reel 11M, only one "CH1" symbol is arranged, and when the stop switch 21M is stopped while the symbols of symbol numbers 3 to 17 are passing on the winning line NL, "CH1" is used. The symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line NL. Therefore, even if the SB combination is won, it may not be possible to draw the symbols constituting the SB combination into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, and there is a possibility that the SB combination will be missed. Therefore, when one of the SB combinations is won, the reel control for drawing in the winning SB combination within the retractable range may be performed, but the SB combination may not be won. As for the SB combination, unlike the RBB combination, if the winning game cannot be won, the winning flag of the SB combination is cleared and the SB combination is not carried over to the next game or later.

The symbols constituting "MRP1", "NRP1" to "NRP3" (for example, symbols such as "REP", "BEL", "B7" and "R7") are arranged within the retractable range in all of the reels 11L to 11R. Includes symbols that are drawn and symbols that are not arranged within the retractable range. However, when "MRP1", "NRP1" to "NRP3" are won, one of the replaying roles that are simultaneously won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R is won at the same time for a plurality of types of replaying roles. You can win a prize.

In the reel stop processing, when a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, priority is given according to the type of winning winning combination (result of the winning combination lottery) and the operation timing and pressing order (operation mode) of the stop switches 21L to 21R. The target to be drawn in is predetermined. FIG. 11A is a diagram for explaining an example of reel control and stoptable rolls performed for each winning combination group during RT0 or RT1 at the time of betting three cards. When the "NRP1" is won, as shown in FIG. 11, when the reel 11L is first stopped, the reel control that draws the "normal RP combination" onto the winning line NL in preference to the other winning combinations. When the reel 11M is stopped for the first time, the reels are controlled so that the "BAR-matched RP combination" and the "B7-matched RP combination" are drawn in with priority over the other winning combinations on the winning line NL, and the reel 11R is moved. When the first stop is performed, reel control is performed in which the "R7 matching RP combination" and the "BAR tempai RP combination" are drawn in with priority over the other winning combinations on the winning line NL. Similarly, when the "NRP2" is won, as shown in FIG. 11, when the reel 11L is first stopped, the "normal RP combination" is given priority over the other winning combinations on the winning line NL. When the reels are pulled in and the reel 11M is stopped for the first time, the reels are controlled so that the "R7 aligned RP role" and the "BAR tempai RP role" are given priority over the other winning combinations on the winning line NL. When the reel 11R is first stopped, reel control is performed in which the "BAR-matched RP combination" and the "B7-matched RP combination" are drawn in with priority over the other winning combinations on the winning line NL. When the "MRP1" or "NRP3" is won, the reel control is performed so that the "normal RP combination" is preferentially drawn onto the winning line NL regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

Next, the reel stop processing when any one of "A_LC1" to "A_RC2" and "B_LC1" to "B_RC2" among the small winning combinations is won will be described. When any of "A_LC1" to "A_RC2" and "B_LC1" to "B_RC2" is won, the target to be pulled in preferentially according to the type of the first stopped reel and the type of the second stopped reel. Is set to be different.

For example, when "A_LC1" is won, as shown in FIG. 11, after the left first stop (the left reel 11L is the first stop), the middle second stop (the middle reel 11M is the second stop). ), It is stipulated that the "correct AT role" should be drawn in with priority over other roles. Further, since the symbols constituting the "correct AT combination" are arranged within the retractable range, the "correct AT combination" is not missed. Therefore, when the "A_LC1" is won, the reel control is performed so that the "correct AT combination" is always won when the left first stop and the middle second stop are made. When winning the "correct AT role", for example, 10 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, when "A_LC1" is won, when the middle or right first stop (the middle or right reel 11M or 11R is the first stop), or when the left first stop and then the right second stop, It is stipulated that other roles that have been won at the same time should be given priority over the "correct AT role". When "A_LC1" is won, when the left first stop and then the right second stop, a "one-card combination" consisting of symbols that can be drawn onto the winning line NL at a rate of 1/2 (timing) It is stipulated to give priority to pulling in. For this reason, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, there may be cases where the symbols constituting the "one-card combination" are drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/2 and won a prize, and none of them can be won at a rate of 1/2. .. In other words, one card wins at a rate of 1/2. In addition, when the player wins "A_LC1" and makes a middle or right first stop, a "one-card combination" composed of symbols that can be drawn onto the winning line NL at a rate (timing) of 1/4 is played. It is stipulated that it should be drawn in with priority, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, one of the winning combinations may be drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/4 and won a prize, and it may not be possible to win any of them at a rate of 3/4. Occurs. In other words, one card wins at a rate of 1/4.

In addition, even when "A_LC2" is won, when the left first stop and the middle second stop (LC-R) are taken, the "correct AT role" is drawn in prior to the other roles, and the "correct AT" is drawn. Reel control is performed so as to win a prize. On the other hand, when the first stop on the left and the second stop on the right, the "one-card combination" composed of symbols that can be drawn onto the winning line NL at a rate of 1/2 (timing) is preferentially drawn. In some cases, one card combination is drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/2 to win a prize, and none of them can be won at a rate of 1/2. In addition, when the player makes the first stop in the middle or right, it is stipulated that the "one-card combination" composed of symbols that can be drawn into the winning line NL at a rate (timing) of 1/4 is given priority. Depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, one card may be drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/4 to win a prize, and none of them may be awarded at a rate of 3/4.

Next, when "A_LR1" is won, when the left first stop and the right second stop (L-RC), the "correct AT role" is drawn in with priority over the other roles, and the "correct answer" is drawn. Reel control is performed so as to win the "AT role". On the other hand, when the first stop on the left and then the second stop on the middle, the "one-card combination" composed of symbols that can be drawn onto the winning line NL at a rate (timing) of 1/2 is preferentially drawn. In some cases, one card combination is drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/2 to win a prize, and none of them can be won at a rate of 1/2. In addition, when the player makes the first stop in the middle or right, it is stipulated that the "one-card combination" composed of symbols that can be drawn into the winning line NL at a rate (timing) of 1/4 is given priority. Depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, one card may be drawn into the winning line at a rate of 1/4 to win a prize, and none of them may be awarded at a rate of 3/4.

Even when "A_LR2" to "B_RC2" are won, as shown in FIG. 11, when the stop operation is performed in the push order corresponding to the "correct answer AT combination", the reel control is performed so as to win the "correct answer AT combination". However, when the stop operation is performed in any other push order, the reel control is performed so as to win one winning combination at a ratio corresponding to the push order. In this way, "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" have different roles to draw in with priority over the winning line NL according to the pushing order, and when the "correct AT role" is won, "BEL" stops on the line, so pushing. Also known as a forward bell.

When any of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" is won, the push order for winning the "correct AT combination" is also called the correct procedure. When any of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" is won during the above-mentioned AT, information that can specify the correct answer procedure can be notified as an advantageous operation mode. As described above, "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" are also referred to as navigation target roles because they are targets of navigation production during AT. For "B_LC1" to "B_RC2", reel control is performed so that when the game state is in RT1, the player always wins the "correct AT combination" regardless of the pressing order.

As described above, the winning probability of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" during RT0 or RT1 at the time of betting three cards is the probability that the payout rate during AT where the navigation effect can be executed is 1 or more. Judgment values are set. Therefore, when the game is controlled by the AT during the advantageous period in the game at the time of betting three cards, the player can have the expectation that the number of medals owned by the player will increase.

In the present embodiment, even when any of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" is won in RT0 middle and the like at the time of two bets, RT0 or RT1 at the time of three bets (shown in FIG. 11A). The same reel control as (contents) is performed. However, as described above, the winning probability of "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" during RT0 or RT2 at the time of betting on two cards is lower than that at the time of RT0 at the time of betting on three cards. Even if it is carried out (even if the navigation effect is executed), the judgment value is set so that the payout rate is less than 1. Therefore, even if the navigation effect is executed in the game at the time of betting two cards, it cannot be expected that the number of medals owned by the player will increase on average. Furthermore, in the game when betting two cards, the ratio of winning "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" and expecting to win the "correct AT role" according to the order of pressing the correct answer is higher than the game when betting three cards. It gets lower. Therefore, in the game at the time of betting two cards, even if the navigation effect is executed, it cannot be said that the merit of the navigation effect can be fully enjoyed.

Next, when the "CH" is won among the small winning combinations, the reel control is performed to prioritize the "cherry winning combination" and pull it onto the winning line NL. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11, the "cherry winning combination" is awarded. be able to. When the "WM1" is won, the reel control for pulling the "watermelon combination 1" onto the winning line NL is performed with priority given to the "watermelon combination 1", so that the "watermelon combination 1" can be won as shown in FIG. When the "WM2" is won, the reel control for pulling the "watermelon role 2" onto the winning line NL is performed with priority given to the "watermelon role 2", so that the "watermelon role 2" can be won as shown in FIG. When "SP1" is won, for example, when a predetermined winning combination is pulled in and the winning combination is missed, as shown in FIG. 11, the predetermined "chance eye 1" among the out-of-order symbol combinations is stopped. It will be possible. When "SP2" is won, for example, when a predetermined winning combination is drawn in and the winning combination is missed, as shown in FIG. 11, the predetermined "chance eye 2" among the out-of-order symbol combinations is stopped. It will be possible. When "BE" is won, reel control is performed so that the player always wins the "correct AT combination" regardless of the order of pressing. In this way, "BE" is also referred to as "common bell" because it is common to win the "correct AT role" regardless of the order of pressing.

In addition, in the reel stop processing when the winning of the bonus role is carried over (in the RBB internal winning state) and the replaying role or the small role is won, the replaying role or the small role is preferentially drawn in over the bonus role. It is stipulated as.

In the reel stop process, if no winning combination is won, a symbol that is a combination of out-of-order symbols that does not win any winning combination is drawn onto the winning line and stopped. If you have not won any of the winning combinations, for example, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode (first stop of the right reel 11R), any of the symbols such as "B7", "R7", and "BAR" is displayed. Reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols is out of alignment while being drawn into the line of. As a result, it is possible to stop the symbol combination similar to that when the "NRP1" or "NRP2" is won, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the "NRP1" or "NRP2" is won. ..

FIG. 11B is a diagram for explaining an example of reel control and stoptable rolls performed for each winning combination group in SB. The lottery target combination in SB is different from that in RT0 and RT1, and "ALL1" and "ALL2" are defined. When "ALL 1" is won, reel control is performed so as to win the "SB middle role 1" accompanied by the payout of one medal regardless of the order of pushing. When "ALL 2" is won, reel control is performed so as to win the "SB middle role 2" with the payout of 10 medals regardless of the order of pushing.

However, as described above, the determination value is set so that the winning probability of the lottery target combination in "SB" is higher in "ALL1" than in "ALL2". Further, the winning probability of each of "ALL1" and "ALL2" is determined so that the payout rate in "SB" is less than 1. Therefore, even when the navigation effect is executed in the game during "SB", it cannot be expected that the number of medals owned by the player will increase on average. Furthermore, in the game during "SB", the outcomes according to the winning combination are stopped regardless of the pressing order. It cannot be expected that a roll with a high degree of advantage such as, etc. can be stopped, and even if the navigation effect is executed, the merit of the navigation effect cannot be enjoyed.

In the reel stop processing, every time any of the reels 11L to 11R stops, a reel stop command that can specify the stopped reel and the stop position (for example, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage) is issued. Output. As a result, the sub-control board 73 can specify the stopped reel and the stop position, and can execute the corresponding effect.

In step S17, it is determined whether or not all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped. When it is not determined in step S17 that all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped, the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S17 that all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped, the process proceeds to step S18.

In step S18, when the operation information is displayed on the notification display 60, the notification display 60 is hidden. In step S19, the second related process is performed as the AT system lottery process after the reel is stopped. In the second related process of step S19, the advantageous period is controlled based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the normal period. In the second related process, a process for controlling the transition of the state during the advantageous period is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the outline of the state transition during the advantageous period will be described.

In the second related process, the advantageous period is controlled based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the normal period. The conditions for shifting to the advantageous period are, for example, the winning combination groups (SB, "A_LC1" to "B_RC2", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", "BE" shown in FIG. 10A. It is established by winning one of the above. For this reason, most of the games are played during an advantageous period. During the advantageous period, the lowest value, which is the lowest accumulated number of differences based on the number of bets and the number of medals awarded since the start of the advantageous period, is set as 0 as the base point, and the current cumulative total from the base point is set. The number (so-called MY value) and the number of games are counted.

When controlled from the normal period to the advantageous period, it is generally controlled in an advantageous manner as shown in FIG. Advantage In general, even if it is controlled to one of a plurality of modes such as low probability, normal, and high probability, the probability of winning in the CZ transition lottery (the degree of advantage for the player) is different. Often, for example, when controlled from a normal period to an advantageous period, it may be controlled to a mode having a high probability of winning in the CZ transition lottery among a plurality of types of modes. By doing so, the player's expectation can be maintained when the normal period immediately after the end of AT is controlled to the advantageous period. Further, the degree of advantage of the AT transition lottery (for example, the rate of winning the AT) in the general advantage may be different depending on the type of mode such as low probability, normal, and high probability. In addition, one or both of the CZ transition lottery and the AT transition lottery may be set to be constant.

Further, when the control is performed from the normal period to the advantageous period, the number of ceiling games required to control the AT is set. The AT is different from the RBB and the like that can be controlled by winning the bonus in the winning combination lottery in that the AT is in a state of being controlled by reaching the number of ceiling games and winning the AT. The number of ceiling games is the number of times the AT is forcibly controlled. When the number of games digested after the advantageous period starts reaches the number of ceiling games, the AT is controlled. The number of ceiling games may be uniformly set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 999 times), or a plurality of games (for example, 250 times) when controlled from a normal period to an advantageous period. , 500 times, 999 times) may be determined by lottery.

When, for example, a CZ transition lottery by SB winning during a normal period or a CZ transition lottery during an advantageous general period is won, the CZ is controlled over a predetermined period (for example, a period during which a predetermined number of games are consumed). When a predetermined period elapses without winning the AT transition in CZ, it is generally controlled again in an advantageous manner. During the normal period, for example, when the player wins the CZ transition lottery by winning the SB, the advantageous general or the AT transition lottery in the CZ, or when the number of ceiling games is reached, the AT is controlled.

During AT, a navigation effect is executed to notify an advantageous operation mode (correct answer procedure) when the "push order bell" and the "RT transition replay" (hereinafter collectively referred to as a navigation target combination) are won. In addition, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games that can be controlled to AT (additional lottery) is controlled to AT again after the end condition of one AT is satisfied (for example, the number of AT games is exhausted). Various ATs that are drawn by lottery as to whether or not to control (AT stock lottery), which is advantageous when there is no AT stock after the condition for ending one AT is satisfied, and whether to control the general or CZ (state lottery after the end of AT). A middle lottery will be held. The lottery during various ATs is, for example, won in a predetermined winning combination group (for example, "RBB", "SB", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", "SP1", "SP2", etc.) in the internal lottery. It is done by doing. Further, in the AT stock lottery, the number of controllable times (AT stock number of times) is added to AT by winning. The number of AT stocks can be repeatedly controlled by the AT after the end of the AT, and is subtracted by 1 each time the control is performed. The degree of advantage (winning probability, etc.) of various AT lottery during AT may be uniformly determined, and a plurality of modes (low probability mode, normal probability mode, high probability mode, etc.) may be set. ), The degree of advantage may be adjusted according to the controlled mode.

When the number of AT games is added in the additional lottery among the lottery during various ATs, it is added to the number of remaining AT games of the AT. Further, when the end condition of the AT being controlled is satisfied and the number of AT stocks is 1 or more, the AT is controlled again. Further, when the end condition of the AT under control is satisfied and the number of AT stocks is not 1 or more, it is controlled to either advantageous general or CZ according to the result of the state lottery after the end of AT.

Next, in step S20, the payout process is performed. In the payout process, the process corresponding to the symbol combination is executed based on the symbol combination on the winning line NL (the symbol combination stopped in the main game, not the pseudo game). For example, when a small winning combination is won, a predetermined number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the type of the winning small winning combination is paid out, or a payout process for adding credits is executed. In the payout process, a payout command that can specify the number of medals (including 0) given to the player by paying out medals or adding credits is output. As a result, the number of medals given to the player as a result of one game can be specified even on the sub control board 73 side. Further, when the re-game combination wins a prize, a process for setting the re-game flag is executed. In the payout process, a game result command that can specify the symbol combination on the winning line NL, the presence or absence of winning, the type of winning combination, etc. is output. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the symbol combination on the winning line NL. Further, in the payout process, the values of various counters used for calculating the advantageous period stay ratio, the bonus ratio, the bonus status ratio, the designated bonus ratio, etc. are updated according to the result of the game. The advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the accessory state ratio, the indicated accessory ratio, and the like are calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. Such a payout process is not performed in the pseudo game, but is performed in the main game.

In step S21, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period ends. The advantageous period is the cumulative number of times the first condition is satisfied when the number of games played during the advantageous period reaches 1500, or the total number of differences based on the number of bets and the number of medals awarded during the advantageous period. The lowest value at which is the lowest is set to 0 as the base point, and the process ends when the second condition is satisfied when the current cumulative number upper limit of 2400 from the base point is reached. When the number of remaining games or the cumulative number until the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is less than a predetermined value, the ending is controlled. Specifically, during AT, the ending is controlled when the number of games played during the advantageous period reaches 1200 or when the difference number during the advantageous period reaches 2000. It is stipulated that the navigation effect is executed even during the ending. The ending continues until the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and is controlled to the normal period when the advantageous period end condition is satisfied by the first condition or the second condition being satisfied. At this time as well, all information regarding the advantageous period, such as the number of differences and the number of games that were updated during the advantageous period, is reset. In addition, when the third condition that is satisfied by digesting the game a predetermined number of times without being transferred to AT during CZ after the end of AT is satisfied, or in the advantageous general and AT transition lottery during CZ, the game is won. The advantageous period ends even when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined number of games are exhausted) without doing so.

When it is determined in step S21 that the advantageous period ends, the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period is performed in step S22. In the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period, all information related to the advantageous period, such as the number of differences and the number of games updated during the advantageous period, is reset (initialized). In step S23, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off with the end of the advantageous period. As a result, the game control process related to one game is completed.

When one game is completed, a game state setting process or the like is also performed. As the game state setting process, for example, a game state flag that can specify the game state from the next time onward is set based on the result of the winning combination lottery or the game. The game state flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies the currently controlled gaming state based on the gaming state flag. FIG. 13 shows the transition of the gaming state.

The game state setting process sets a game state flag that can specify "RT0" when it is initialized by changing the setting or the like. In "RT0", "3" and "2" are defined as the specified number of bets. In a game in which the bet number "3" is set in "RT0", if any of "RBB combination 1" to "RBB combination 3" is won but no prize is won, a game status flag that can identify "RT1" is set. Set. In the game that won "RBB role 1" to "RBB role 3" or the game in "RT1" that the winning is carried over, the winning RBB role among "RBB role 1" to "RBB role 3" When a prize is won, the RBB is controlled by setting a game state flag that can identify the RBB corresponding to the winning RBB combination among the bonus states "RBB1" to "RBB4".

On the other hand, in the game in which the bet number "2" is set in "RT0", when the "RBB combination 4" or the "RBB combination 5" is won but the prize is not won, the game state flag that can specify "RT2" is set. do. In "RT2", "3" and "2" are defined as the specified number of bets. When winning the winning RBB role in the game that won the "RBB role 4" or "RBB role 5", the RBB corresponding to the winning RBB role among the bonus states "RBB4" or "RBB5" is specified. Set a possible game status flag and control it to RBB.

The game state setting process counts the number of payouts in the RBB, and sets a game state flag capable of specifying "RT0" when the number of payouts exceeds the number corresponding to the type of winning bonus combination. As a result, when the "RBB role" is won or not won in "RT0", it is controlled to "RT1" or "RT2" as the RBB internal winning state, and when the "RBB role" is won, the bonus state is ". Control to "RBB". When the specified number of payouts is made in the RBB, the RBB ends and the control is set to "RT0". Further, when the "SB combination" is won and won in the game in which the bet number "3" is set in "RT0", it is controlled to "SB". "SB" ends with one game, and then is controlled to "RT0" again.

Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described. In the following, first, the transition of the gaming state when the AT is not controlled during the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as non-AT) will be described. During the non-AT period during the advantageous period, even if "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" are won, the AT game for notifying the advantageous operation mode is not performed. Therefore, it is not possible to intentionally win the "correct AT role". On the other hand, when the AT is controlled during the advantageous period, when the "A_LC1" to "B_RC2" are won, the advantageous operation mode for winning the "correct AT combination" is the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display. It can be notified by the device 27. As a result, when the advantageous operation mode is notified, the "correct AT combination" can be reliably won as long as the stop operation is not mistaken. As a result, the rate at which 10 medals are paid out increases during AT during the advantageous period.

Further, in the game state setting process, which game state (RBB, SB, RT0 to RT2) the next and subsequent games are in, the normal period, the advantageous general of the advantageous periods, the CZ, and the AT (remaining AT). A status command that can specify which of the following (including the value of the game number counter), various information updated during the advantageous period (satisfaction of conditions for performing various AT lottery, AT start, CZ start), etc. Output. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute the effect according to the state from the next time onward. When the game control process for one game is completed, a process for clearing the bet number and enabling the next bet number setting is also performed.

<Production control processing>
The sub CPU 71 executes the effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on the command from the main control board 63, and performs the effect lottery to determine the presence / absence and type of the effect execution according to the progress of the game by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the effect control process for driving and controlling the liquid crystal display 27, the speakers 31L, 31R, and various lamps / LEDs connected to the sub control board 73 is performed. The effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect is included in the effect control process performed by the sub CPU 71. An example of the effect executed by the effect control process will be described below.

In the effect control process, when a winning type command capable of specifying the type of the winning combination group won in the combination lottery is received, the effect according to the type of the winning combination group can be executed. The effect control process is based on the reception of the winning type command, for example, when the winning type command of "RBB" is received, a confirmation screen including "bonus confirmed!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, or " Based on the winning type command that can specify the "pushing order bell", an effect of displaying an image of a "yellow balloon" having a color similar to that of the bell on the liquid crystal display 27 is executed. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while guessing the winning combination group, and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect control process, when a push order command for specifying a value stored in the push order buffer is received during AT, the display content specified from the command (see FIG. 6B) is advantageous. As an operation mode, an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 is executed. As a result, when one of the navigation target combinations is won during AT, the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer procedure, and it is possible to surely win the "correct answer AT combination". An image that can specify an advantageous operation mode is also referred to as a navigation effect. Further, when the pseudo game is in progress, various effects corresponding to the pseudo game are executed. Similar to the above-mentioned navigation effect, the various effects corresponding to the simulated game include an effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation and an effect of notifying that the pseudo game is in progress. Further, in the effect control process, the process of controlling the type of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 according to the state controlled on the main control board 63 side, and the game specifying lamp 82 are controlled in the corresponding manners. Processing is done.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining the game specifying lamp control process included in the effect control process. In the game specifying lamp control process, a process for controlling the lighting mode of the game specifying lamp 82 is performed according to a state controlled on the main control board 63 side. In step S101, for example, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command for specifying the CZ start has been received based on the state command transmitted in the second related process. When it is not determined in step S101 that the CZ start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S103. When it is determined in step S101 that the CZ start command has been received, the game identification lamp 80 is controlled in the CZ mode (for example, lit in yellow) in step S102. As a result, the character "CZ" can be raised so that it can be visually recognized, and the player can be notified that "CZ" is in progress.

In step S103, for example, it is determined whether or not an AT start command for specifying the AT start has been received based on the state command transmitted in the second related process. If it is not determined in step S103 that the AT start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S105. When it is determined in step S103 that the AT start command has been received, the game identification lamp 80 is controlled in the AT mode (for example, lit in blue) in step S104. As a result, the character "AT" can be highlighted so that it can be visually recognized, and the player can be notified that "AT" is in progress.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game start command (see step S41 in FIG. 7) has been received. When it is not determined in step S105 that the pseudo game start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S108. When it is determined in step S105 that the pseudo game start command has been received, the game identification lamp 80 is controlled in the pseudo game mode (for example, lit in red) in step S106. As a result, the characters "pseudo-game" can be highlighted so that they can be visually recognized, and the player can be notified that the "pseudo-game" is in progress. In step S107, a pseudo game flag for specifying that the pseudo game is in progress is set. At the timing of controlling the game identification lamp 80 in the pseudo game mode in step S106, the liquid crystal display 27 also displays an image (image of the pseudo game identification notification) for notifying that the pseudo game is in progress. ..

In step S108, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game end command (see step S51 in FIG. 7) has been received. When it is not determined in step S108 that the pseudo game end command has been received, the game identification lamp control process is terminated. When it is determined in step S108 that the pseudo game end command has been received, the game identification lamp 80 is controlled in step S109 according to the state currently being controlled based on the state command. As a result, the state currently being controlled can be notified. When it is neither "pseudo game", "CZ", nor "AT", the game specifying lamp 82 is controlled to be in a non-lighting state, and no character can be visually recognized. In step S110, the pseudo game flag is reset with the end of the pseudo game. At the timing when the control of the game identification lamp 80 in the pseudo game mode is terminated in step S109, the liquid crystal display 27 also displays an image (image of the pseudo game specific notification) for notifying that the pseudo game is in progress. Hide it.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart for explaining the navigation-related processing included in the effect control processing. In the navigation-related processing, processing for controlling the navigation effect for notifying the mode of the stop operation is performed. In step S120, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set (see step S107 in FIG. 14). That is, it is determined whether or not a pseudo game is in progress. When it is not determined in step S120 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S125. When it is determined in step S120 that the pseudo game flag is set, the notification content regarding the pseudo stop is determined in step S121 regardless of whether or not it is in the advantageous period or during AT, and a predetermined value is determined. You will be notified at the timing.

The notification content regarding the pseudo stop includes, for example, information suggesting a push order, which is an aspect of the stop operation, and information suggesting a symbol to be aimed at. The content of the notification regarding the pseudo stop in step S121 may be determined based on the mode of the stop operation defined by the value specified from the push order command from the main control board 63 side, and may be a combination. It may be determined according to the result of the lottery.

Further, the content of the notification regarding the pseudo stop in step S121 is a symbol that is predetermined as a position to be pseudo-stopped on the main control board 63 side regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery on the main control board 63 side. May be specified from the above-mentioned pseudo-stop schedule symbol command or the like, and the content corresponding to the symbol may be used. For example, when the symbol to be pseudo-stopped is determined on the main control board 63 side and the pseudo-stop scheduled symbol command is transmitted, in step S121, the symbol scheduled to be pseudo-stopped based on the pseudo-stop scheduled symbol command. Depending on the situation, the content of the notification such as the navigation effect to be notified during the simulated game may be determined. Further, when a specific symbol combination is always pseudo-stopped when a pseudo game occurs, in step S121, the notification content corresponding to the specific symbol combination may be specified based on the pseudo game start command. Further, the notification content regarding the pseudo stop in step S121 is independently determined on the sub control board 73 side regardless of the determination result on the main control board 63 side (for example, the value specified from the push order command). Alternatively, for example, it may be randomly determined by a random number lottery or the like in step S121.

Further, as the predetermined timing, for example, the timing at which the reel rotation in the simulated game is started, the timing at which the reel rotation is started and the constant speed (the speed at which the pseudo stop is enabled) is reached, and the pseudo stop operation during the simulated game are performed. One of the timings, such as the activated timing, is defined.

In step S122, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag has been reset (see step S110 in FIG. 14). When it is determined in step S122 that the pseudo game flag has been reset, the process proceeds to step S125. When it is not determined in step S122 that the pseudo game flag has been reset, in step S123, a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) from the previous operation (for example, start lever operation, operation to the stop switch for pseudo stop, etc.) ) It is determined whether or not it has passed. If it is not determined in step S123 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous operation, the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S123 that a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous operation, the pseudo stop operation promotion effect for prompting the operation to the stop switch for the pseudo stop is performed in step S124, and the process proceeds to step S122. As a pseudo stop operation promotion effect, for example, a message such as "Let's make a pseudo stop!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to perform an operation for pseudo-stopping.

In step S125, it is determined whether or not the push order command has been received. When it is not determined in step S125 that the push order command has been received, the navigation-related processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S125 that the push order command has been received, the notification content of the navigation effect based on the push order command is determined in step S126, and the notification is made at a predetermined timing. The notification content of the navigation effect suggests, for example, the mode of the stop operation defined by the value specified from the push order command, and is the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display of FIG. 6 (b). Is determined. Further, the predetermined timing is a timing related to (corresponding to) the start of the random delay process after the end of the pseudo game, for example, a timing at which the reel rotation is started, a steady rotation speed at which the reel rotation is started (stop effective). The timing at which the speed is reached, the timing at which the stop operation (main stop) is enabled, and the like are defined.

In step S127, it is determined whether or not the reel is rotating, that is, whether or not the game is being played. When it is determined in step S127 that the reel is rotating, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from the previous operation (for example, start lever operation, stop operation to the stop switch, etc.) in step S128 is performed. It is judged. If it is not determined in step S128 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous operation, the process proceeds to step S130. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S128 that a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous operation, a stop operation promotion effect for prompting the stop operation to the stop switch is performed in step S129, and the process proceeds to step S130. As a stop operation promotion effect, for example, a message such as "Let's stop the reel!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to perform an operation for stopping the reel.

In step S130, it is determined whether or not an operation that does not match the notification content by the navigation effect is accepted, that is, whether or not there is an operation error. If it is not determined that there was an operation error in step S130, the process proceeds to step S127. When it is determined that there is an operation error in step S130, the navigation effect being executed in step S131 is terminated in the middle and the process proceeds to step S127.

(Example when a pseudo game occurs during AT)
Next, various control contents during the simulated game and after the simulated game is completed will be described more specifically. FIG. 16 is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when a pseudo game occurs during AT. In FIG. 16, from the top, the type of game state, the number of games (games), whether or not the maximum bet switch 17 is operated, whether or not the start switch 19 is operated, the display content of the liquid crystal display 27, and the left reel 11L. ~ Right reel 11R state, left stop switch 21L ~ right stop switch 21R each operation, advantageous period notification lamp 80 lighting state, pseudo game specific notification notification state, and notification display 60 display The content is shown and the passage of time is shown from left to right. Further, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of display modes of the notification display 60, the liquid crystal display 27, and the game specifying lamp 82 corresponding to FIG.

In FIG. 16, it is "AT game in progress" as shown in the game status column, and "N-1 game", "N game", and "N + 1 game" as shown in the number of games column. The content of the game is shown. In addition, in the number of games column, the number of games (games) is indicated by indicating "pseudo-game" to indicate that a pseudo-game is in progress, and the indication "main game" indicates that a non-pseudo-game is in progress. It shows that. In FIG. 16, since the AT is in the state where the advantageous operation mode can be notified, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned “ON” and is lit as shown in the advantageous period notification lamp column. ..

Timing 1 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the game of "N-1 game" is performed, and timing 2 is operated by the start lever for starting the game of "N-1 game". The timing was shown. When the AT combination is won because the AT is in progress, the sub side corresponding to the value stored in the push order buffer in the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in the liquid crystal column and the notification display column of the timing 2. Is executed (see step S126 in FIG. 15), and the notification display 60 is turned “ON” and the display contents corresponding to the values stored in the push order buffer are displayed (step in FIG. 5). See S14).

FIG. 17A shows an example of the display mode in the “N-1 game”. In the notification display 60, "1" is displayed as the display content corresponding to the push order buffer value "1", and in the liquid crystal display 27, the push order buffer value "1" is displayed in the lower region of the screen. "1, 2, 3" is displayed as the display content corresponding to "", and the advantageous operation mode is notified. Further, since the AT is in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is lit, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the AT mode. Further, in the upper region of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, AT-related game information updated according to the progress of AT is displayed. As AT-related game information, for example, "LAST: 350G" is shown as the number of remaining games of AT in the upper left of the screen, and "TOTAL150G" is shown as the number of games digested in AT, and the net increase in AT is shown in the upper right of the screen. "GET: 350" is shown as the number of sheets.

Returning to FIG. 16, as shown in the timing 2 and subsequent steps, the rotation of each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is started and controlled to rotate at a steady rotation speed as the start lever is operated. The solid line in the upward-sloping direction in the columns of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R indicates the state in which the reel is accelerating until it reaches a predetermined speed, which is the steady rotation speed, and the solid line in the horizontal direction is the speed at which the reel becomes constant. It shows the rotating state.

After the steady rotation speed is reached and the stop operation is enabled, the corresponding reels are stopped according to the stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R (step S16 in FIG. 5). The solid lines in the vertical direction in the columns of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R indicate the timing at which the stop operation is performed. Further, the solid line in the vertical direction in the columns of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R indicates a state in which the rotating reel is stopped. In the example of the "N-1 game" of FIG. 16, it is shown that the left reel 11L is stopped first, the middle reel 11M is stopped second, and the right reel 11R is stopped third according to the navigation effect or the like. Has been done. The notification display 60 goes into a non-display state at the timing when all reels are stopped (step S18 in FIG. 5). That is, "1" displayed on the notification display 60 of FIG. 17A is hidden at the timing when all the reels are stopped. On the other hand, the navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 ends when an operation for setting the bet number of the next game is accepted (see timing 3 in FIG. 16). The navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 may also be terminated at the timing when all reels are stopped.

Timing 3 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the "N game" game is performed, and timing 4 indicates the timing at which the start lever for starting the "N game" game is operated. It is shown. In the "N game", an example is shown in which a specific condition is satisfied and a pseudo game is generated over timings 4 to 5 when the start lever is operated. Even during the simulated game, the lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is maintained. Further, when the start lever is operated, as shown in the liquid crystal column of the timing 4 and the pseudo game specific notification column, the liquid crystal display 27 executes the navigation effect on the sub side (see step S121 in FIG. 15). , Pseudo-game specific notification is executed (see step S106 in FIG. 14). On the other hand, as shown in the notification display column of the timing 4, the notification display 60 is not used during the simulated game even when the AT combination is won. It is maintained in the display state, and the information for specifying the mode of the stop operation is not displayed by the notification display 60. The operation on the start lever at the timing 4 of FIG. 16 is an operation that triggers the start of the pseudo game, and since the main game is started after the pseudo game, the main game is to be started later. It is also an operation.

FIG. 17B shows an example of the display mode at the start of the pseudo game in the “N game”. In the notification display 60, even when the AT is in progress and the AT combination is won, the mode of the stop operation is not suggested during the simulated game and the display state is hidden, which is advantageous. The lighting state of the period notification lamp 80 is maintained. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display 27, "3.2.1" is displayed as a display content indicating the pressing order in the lower region of the screen. When a navigation effect is generated on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game, the navigation effect is different from the control content (steps S130, S131, etc. in FIG. 15) regarding the navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 during the main game. Even if the stop operation cannot be performed due to the push order suggested by the above and an operation error occurs, the navigation effect is continuously displayed thereafter.

Further, as the pseudo game identification notification, an image that scrolls a message such as "during pseudo game" is displayed in the band area below the liquid crystal display 27, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the pseudo game mode. .. The AT-related game information in the upper region of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27 is updated according to the result of the game in the "N-1 game".

Returning to FIG. 16, as shown in Timing 4 and later, even during the simulated game, as in the main game and the like shown in Timing 2 and later, the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R are each accompanied by the operation to the start lever. The rotation is started and controlled to rotate at a constant speed. After reaching a constant speed and enabling the pseudo stop, the corresponding reel can be pseudo-stopped in response to the pseudo stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R. The vertical dotted lines in the columns of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R indicate the timing at which the pseudo stop operation is performed. In the example of the simulated game of "N game" of FIG. 16, the right reel 11R is stopped first, the middle reel 11M is stopped second, and the left reel 11L is stopped third according to the navigation effect or the like. It is shown. Further, a solid line in the vertical direction in the columns from the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R, which is lowered to half the height in the column, indicates a state in which the rotating reel is pseudo-stopped, and the rotating reel is quasi-stopped from half the height in the horizontal direction. The extending line shows a state in which the reel that has been pseudo-stopped vibrates slightly at regular time intervals (500 msec).

FIG. 17C shows an example of a display mode when all reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game in the “N-game”. When all the reels are pseudo-stopped, a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a result of the pseudo-game. In the example of FIG. 17C, an image corresponding to the bell symbol is displayed in the center area of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27. As the image displayed when the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, it is permissible to display not only the symbol stopped on the winning line NL but also the image related to the symbol not stopped on the winning line NL. Has been done. On the other hand, when the symbol combination is displayed in this game, it is possible to display the image related to the symbol stopped on the winning line NL, but the image related to the symbol not stopped on the winning line NL can be displayed. It cannot be displayed. Except for the point that a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, other devices (notification display 60, advantageous period notification lamp 80, game identification) even when the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. The state of the lamp 82) and the game information related to the AT are maintained. The pseudo-game specific notification shown in FIG. 17 (c) continues until the pseudo-game ends, and ends at the timing when the start lever operation is performed and the pseudo-game ends (steps S50 and S51 in FIG. 7, FIG. 14 steps S105 to S110).

The timing 5 indicates the timing at which the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game in the “N game”. When the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, the liquid crystal display as shown in the liquid crystal column and the notification display column of the timing 5 on condition that the AT combination is won. The sub-side navigation effect according to the value stored in the push order buffer is executed on the display 27 (see step S126 in FIG. 15), and at the same time, the notification display 60 becomes “ON” and is stored in the push order buffer. The display contents corresponding to the displayed values are displayed (see step S14 in FIG. 5).

FIG. 17D shows an example of the display mode of the “N game” in the main game. In the notification display 60, "6" is displayed as the display content corresponding to the push order buffer value "6", and in the liquid crystal display 27, the push order buffer value "6" is displayed in the lower region of the screen. "3.2.1" is displayed as the display content corresponding to "", and the advantageous operation mode is notified. Further, since the AT is in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 remains lit, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the AT mode. Further, the AT-related game information in the upper region of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27 is continuously displayed.

Further, at the timing 5 in which the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game of the "N game", the rotation start timing is randomly delayed for each reel (steps S61 to FIG. 8). S69) is performed. Therefore, first, the rotation of the left reel 11L is started after the lapse of the randomly delayed time, then the rotation of the middle reel 11M is started after the lapse of the randomly delayed time, and finally, after the lapse of the randomly delayed time. The rotation of the right reel 11R is started. As shown in the timing 5 and later, as the start lever is operated, the rotation of each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is started and the rotation speed becomes steady, and the stop operation is enabled. After that, the corresponding reel is stopped according to the stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R (step S16 in FIG. 5). In the example of the main game of "N game" of FIG. 16, the right reel 11R is stopped first, the middle reel 11M is stopped second, and the left reel 11L is stopped third according to the navigation effect and the like. It is shown. The notification display 60 goes into a non-display state when all reels are stopped. That is, "6" displayed on the notification display 60 of FIG. 17D is hidden at the timing when all the reels are stopped. On the other hand, the navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 ends when the operation for setting the bet number of the next game is accepted. The navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 may also be terminated at the timing when all reels are stopped. Since the operation to the start lever at the timing 5 is an operation for shifting to the main game after the pseudo game is completed and the random delay process is performed, the operation is also referred to as an introduction operation below.

Timing 6 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the "N + 1 game" game is performed, and timing 7 indicates the timing at which the start lever for starting the "N + 1 game" game is operated. It is shown. When the AT role is won because it is in AT, the navigation effect on the sub side according to the value stored in the push order buffer is executed on the liquid crystal display 27 as in the case of "N-1 game". At the same time, the notification display 60 is turned "ON" and the display content corresponding to the value stored in the push order buffer is displayed. However, since the timing 7 in FIG. 16 indicates that the AT combination has not been won, the liquid crystal display 27 has a sub-side as shown in the liquid crystal display column, the notification display column, and FIG. 17 (d). The navigation effect is not executed, and the display content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60. Since the AT is in progress, the state in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is lit is maintained, and the control of the game specifying lamp 82 is maintained in the AT mode. Further, the AT-related game information in the upper region of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27 is updated and displayed.

(Example when a pseudo game occurs during normal times)
FIG. 18 is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when a pseudo game occurs during normal times (for example, during non-AT, during non-advantageous period, etc.). In the normal state in FIG. 18, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit, and the advantageous general control shown in FIG. 12 is performed. Further, FIG. 18 shows an example in which the AT is not won and the opportunity for the advantageous period notification lamp 80 to light is not established. Also in FIG. 18, the same items as in FIG. 16 are shown from above, and the passage of time is shown from left to right. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display modes of the notification display 60, the liquid crystal display 27, and the game specifying lamp 82 corresponding to FIG.

In FIG. 18, as shown in the game status column, it is "normal game in progress", and as shown in the number of games column, "N-1 game", "N game", and "N + 1 game". The content of the game is shown. In FIG. 18, since it is in a normal state and the advantageous operation mode cannot be notified, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is “OFF” and is not lit as shown in the advantageous period notification lamp column. There is.

Timing 1 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the game of "N-1 game" is performed, and timing 2 is operated by the start lever for starting the game of "N-1 game". The timing was shown. Even if the AT combination is won because it is normal, the sub-side navigation effect is not executed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in the liquid crystal display column and the notification display column at timing 2, and the navigation effect is not executed. , The display content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60.

FIG. 19A shows an example of the display mode in the “N-1 game”. Neither the notification display 60 nor the liquid crystal display 27 displays the content regarding the mode of the stop operation. Further, since it is normally in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit, and since it is generally advantageous, the game identification lamp 82 is not lit and is controlled so that characters and the like cannot be visually recognized. Has been done. Further, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, a normal screen corresponding to normal is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 18, as shown in the timing 2 and later, as the start lever is operated, the rotation of each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is started and controlled to rotate at a steady rotation speed. After the steady rotation speed is reached and the stop operation is enabled, the corresponding reels are stopped according to the stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R (step S16 in FIG. 5).

Timing 3 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the "N game" game is performed, and timing 4 indicates the timing at which the start lever for starting the "N game" game is operated. It is shown. In the "N game", an example is shown in which a specific condition is satisfied and a pseudo game is generated over timings 4 to 5 when the start lever is operated. When the start lever is operated, as shown in the liquid crystal column of timing 4 and the pseudo-game specific notification column, the liquid crystal display 27 can execute the navigation effect on the sub side (see step S121 in FIG. 15). Pseudo-game specific notification is executed (see step S106 in FIG. 14). However, since it is normally in progress, the non-lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is maintained even during the simulated game, and even when the AT combination is won, the notification display 60 is displayed. The hidden state is maintained. The operation of the start lever at the timing 4 in FIG. 18 is an operation that triggers the start of the pseudo game, and since the main game is started after the pseudo game, the main game is to be started later. It is also an operation.

FIG. 19B shows an example of a display mode at the start of a pseudo game in the “N game”. In the liquid crystal display 27, "3.2.1" is displayed as a display content indicating the pressing order in the lower region of the screen, and a predetermined character image is displayed in the center of the screen. When a navigation effect occurs on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game, the navigation effect is different from the control content (steps S130, S131, etc. in FIG. 15) regarding the navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 27 during the main game. Even if the stop operation cannot be performed due to the push order suggested by the above and an operation error occurs, the navigation effect is continuously displayed thereafter. Further, as the pseudo game identification notification, an image that scrolls a message such as "during pseudo game" is displayed in the band area below the liquid crystal display 27, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the pseudo game mode. .. On the other hand, the non-lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is maintained, and the non-display state of the notification display 60 is maintained even when the AT combination is won, and the content regarding the mode of the stop operation is described. It will not be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 18, as shown in Timing 4, even during the simulated game, as in the main game and the like shown after Timing 2, each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is operated by operating the start lever. The rotation is started and controlled to rotate at a constant speed. After reaching a constant speed and enabling the pseudo stop, the corresponding reel can be pseudo-stopped in response to the pseudo stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R. The reel that has been pseudo-stopped is controlled to vibrate slightly at regular time intervals (500 msec).

When all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game in the "N game", a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a result of the pseudo-game, as in the case of AT. The navigation effect on the sub side and the pseudo game specific notification on the liquid crystal display 27 continue until the pseudo game ends, and the start lever operation is performed to end the pseudo game at the timing when the pseudo game ends.

The timing 5 indicates the timing at which the start lever is operated (introduction operation) after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game of the “N game”. Similarly, when the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the simulated game, as shown in the liquid crystal display column and the notification display column of timing 5 and FIG. 19 (c), the advantageous period notification lamp is used. With respect to 80, the non-lighting state is maintained, the content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60, and the navigation effect on the sub side is not executed on the liquid crystal display 27.

Further, at the timing 5 in which the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game of "N game", the rotation start timing is randomly delayed for each reel (steps S61 to FIG. 8). S69) is performed. As shown in the timing 5 and later, as the start lever is operated, a random delay is generated and the rotation of each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is started, and the rotation speed becomes constant. After the stop operation is enabled, the corresponding reel is stopped in response to the stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R (step S16 in FIG. 5).

Timing 6 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the "N + 1 game" game is performed, and timing 7 indicates the timing at which the start lever for starting the "N + 1 game" game is operated. It is shown. Even if the AT role is won because it is normal, the sub-side navigation effect is not executed in the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in the liquid crystal display column, the notification display column, and FIG. 17 (d). In addition, the display content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60.

(Example when the advantageous period notification lamp lights up in a game in which a pseudo game occurs)
FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining various control contents when the advantageous period notification lamp is turned on in a game in which a pseudo game occurs during normal operation. The normal state in FIG. 20 means that the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit and is controlled by the CZ shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 20 shows an example in which an opportunity to turn on the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is established in a game in which a pseudo game is generated according to the AT winning. Also in FIG. 20, the same items as those in FIG. 16 and the like are shown from above, and the passage of time is shown from left to right. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of display modes of the notification display 60, the liquid crystal display 27, and the game specifying lamp 82 corresponding to FIG. 20.

In FIG. 20, it is "normal game in progress" as shown in the game status column, and "N-1 game", "N game", and "N + 1 game" as shown in the number of games column. The content of the game is shown. At timing 1 of FIG. 20, since it is normal and the advantageous operation mode cannot be notified, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is “OFF” and is not lit as shown in the advantageous period notification lamp column. It is shown. Timing 1 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the game of "N-1 game" is performed, and timing 2 is operated by the start lever for starting the game of "N-1 game". The timing was shown. Even if the AT combination is won because it is normal, the sub-side navigation effect is not executed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in the liquid crystal display column and the notification display field at timing 2, and the navigation effect is not executed. , The display content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60.

FIG. 21A shows an example of the display mode in the “N-1 game”. Neither the notification display 60 nor the liquid crystal display 27 displays the content regarding the mode of the stop operation. Further, since it is normally in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit. The game identification lamp 82 is controlled in a CZ mode (step S102 in FIG. 14). Further, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, a normal screen corresponding to the normal state (here, CZ) is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 20, as shown in the timing 2 and later, as the start lever is operated, the rotation of each of the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R is started and controlled to rotate at a steady rotation speed. After the steady rotation speed is reached and the stop operation is enabled, the corresponding reels are stopped according to the stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R (step S16 in FIG. 5).

Timing 3 indicates the timing at which the bet number setting operation for the "N game" game is performed, and timing 4 indicates the timing at which the start lever for starting the "N game" game is operated. It is shown. The game in the "N game" is a game in which it is determined to turn on the advantageous period notification lamp 80, and a specific condition is satisfied, and a pseudo game is performed over timings 4 to 5 when the start lever is operated. An example of the game that occurs is shown. Here, an example is shown in which the decision to turn on the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not related to the establishment of the specific condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on. By being determined, the specific condition may be satisfied, and the advantageous period is determined by satisfying the specific condition according to the result of the winning combination lottery when the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit. It may be determined to turn on the notification lamp 80.

In the example of FIG. 20, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is controlled to be lit at the timing 4 when the simulated game is started (see step S33 of FIG. 6). The timing for controlling the advantageous period notification lamp 80 to the lighting state at the timing when the simulated game is started may be the timing until the content suggesting the mode of the stop operation is notified in the main game, for example, the reel in the simulated game. When the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation speed of the reel in the pseudo game reaches a constant speed, when the pseudo stop operation is enabled, when the reel is first pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and last in the pseudo game. This may be the case when the reel of the reel is pseudo-stopped.

Further, when the start lever is operated, as shown in the liquid crystal column and the pseudo game specific notification column of the timing 4, the liquid crystal display 27 executes the navigation effect on the sub side (see step S121 in FIG. 15). , Pseudo-game specific notification is executed (see step S106 in FIG. 14). On the other hand, as shown in the notification display column of the timing 4, the notification display 60 is maintained in the non-display state during the simulated game even when the AT combination is won. , Information for specifying the mode of the stop operation is not displayed by the notification display 60. The operation on the start lever at the timing 4 in FIG. 20 is an operation that triggers the start of the pseudo game, and since the main game is started after the pseudo game, the main game is to be started later. It is also an operation.

FIG. 21B shows an example of the display mode at the start of the pseudo game in the “N game”. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 may be in a lit state, but the notification display 60 does not suggest a mode of stop operation during the simulated game even when the AT combination is won. The hidden state is maintained. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display 27, as an example of a navigation effect or the like, a target image for aiming at a BAR symbol is displayed in the central region of the screen. The aiming image includes a BAR symbol suggestion unit that suggests a "BAR" symbol arranged on a reel, and an operation mode suggestion unit (left-pointing arrow) that suggests an operation mode (reverse push). In addition, the BAR symbol suggestion section includes a character image section such as "Aim!". This makes it possible to urge the player to aim and stop the "BAR" symbol by pushing it backwards.

Further, as the pseudo game identification notification, an image that scrolls a message such as "during pseudo game" is displayed in the band area below the liquid crystal display 27, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the pseudo game mode. ..

Returning to FIG. 20, as shown in Timing 4, even during the simulated game, as in the main game and the like shown in Timing 2 and later, the left reel 11L to the right reel 11R are each accompanied by the operation to the start lever. The rotation is started and controlled to rotate at a constant speed. After reaching a constant speed and enabling the pseudo stop, the corresponding reel can be pseudo-stopped in response to the pseudo stop operation for each of the left stop switch 21L to the right stop switch 21R. In the example of the simulated game of "N game" of FIG. 20, it is shown that the right reel 11R is stopped first, the middle reel 11M is stopped second, and the left reel 11L is stopped third according to the aiming image. Has been done. The reel that has been pseudo-stopped is controlled to vibrate slightly at regular time intervals (500 msec).

21 (c) and 21 (d) show examples of display modes when all reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game in the "N game", respectively. When all the reels are pseudo-stopped and the BARs are aligned, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), a production image suggesting that the AT transition is won as a result of the pseudo game (for example, "in the jagged mark" A message such as "AT acquisition") is displayed. On the other hand, when all the reels are pseudo-stopped and the BARs are not aligned, as shown in FIG. 21D, a production image as if the AT transition was not won as a result of the pseudo game (for example, " A message such as "Shin" is displayed.

Whether or not the BARs are aligned in the reel control during the simulated game is specified in step S45 of FIG. 7 depending on whether or not the AT is won. In step S45 of FIG. 7, for example, when the AT is won, the reel control in which the BARs are aligned can be executed according to the mode of the pseudo stop operation, while when the AT is not won, the mode of the pseudo stop operation is set. Regardless, the reel control that does not have BAR alignment is executed. When the AT is won, the reel control may be performed so that the BARs are aligned regardless of the mode of the pseudo stop operation, or the reels may be controlled so that the BARs are not aligned regardless of the mode of the pseudo stop operation. It should be noted that, except that a predetermined image corresponding to the pseudo-stopped symbol combination is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, other devices (notification display) even when the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. The state of the device 60, the advantageous period notification lamp 80, the game identification lamp 82), and the like are maintained. The pseudo-game specific notification shown in FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d) continues until the pseudo-game ends, and ends at the timing when the start lever operation is performed and the pseudo-game ends. In FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (g), the game identification lamp 82 is shown below the notification display 60 for convenience of explanation.

The timing 5 indicates the timing at which the start lever is operated (introduction operation) after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game of the “N game”. On condition that the AT has been won and the AT combination has been won, the value stored in the push order buffer in the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in the liquid crystal column and the notification display column of the timing 5 The corresponding navigation effect on the sub side is executed (see step S126 in FIG. 15), and at the same time, the notification display 60 becomes "ON" and the display content corresponding to the value stored in the push order buffer is displayed (see step S126 in FIG. 15). See step S14 in FIG. 5).

FIG. 21 (e) shows an example of the display mode in the main game after the display mode of FIG. 21 (c) is obtained in the simulated game of the “N game”. In the notification display 60, "6" is displayed as the display content corresponding to the push order buffer value "6", and in the liquid crystal display 27, the push order buffer value "6" is displayed in the lower region of the screen. "3.2.1" is displayed as the display content corresponding to "", and the advantageous operation mode is notified. Further, since the AT is in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 remains lit, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the AT mode. In addition, AT-related game information in the upper region of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed.

Even if the AT is won, reel control is performed according to the mode of the pseudo stop operation in step S45 of FIG. 7, so that the BAR may not be aligned depending on the mode of the pseudo stop operation. In this case, after the display mode shown in FIG. 21 (d) is displayed in the simulated game of the "N game", the display mode shown in FIG. 21 (f) is used and the AT is notified that the AT has been won. , Figure 21 (e). When the pseudo game is terminated by the start lever operation and the random delay processing (steps S61 to S69 in FIG. 8) is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), an effect suggesting that the AT transition is won. An image (for example, a message such as "Resurrection acquisition" in the jagged mark) is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the AT has been won. After that, the process shifts to FIG. 21 (e). Also in FIG. 21 (f), similarly to FIG. 21 (e), "6" is displayed as the display content corresponding to the push order buffer value "6" on the notification display 60, and the advantageous operation mode is It has been notified. Regarding FIG. 21 (f), an effect suggesting that the advantageous operation mode is first notified on the notification display 60 in terms of timing, and then (for example, after 2 seconds have elapsed) that the AT transition has been won. An image (for example, a message such as "acquisition of resurrection" in a jagged mark) may be displayed. In this case, the player can be focused on the display of the notification display 60 (the degree of attention can be improved). Further, since the AT is in progress, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 remains lit, and the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the AT mode. In the example of FIG. 21 (f), the navigation effect on the sub side of the liquid crystal display 27 is not displayed and the AT-related game information is not displayed, but these are also displayed at the stage of FIG. 21 (f). Information (similar to FIG. 21 (e)) may be displayed.

Next, an example will be given of a display mode when the BAR is not uniform in the simulated game and the display mode is as shown in FIG. 21 (d), and the AT is not won. When the start lever is operated after the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the simulated game and the AT is not won, the lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is set as shown in FIG. 21 (g). Although it is maintained, the content regarding the mode of the stop operation is not displayed on the notification display 60, and the navigation effect on the sub side is not executed on the liquid crystal display 27. Further, since the pseudo game identification notification is also terminated and the state returns to the CZ before the pseudo game, the game identification lamp 82 is controlled in the CZ mode. The lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is controlled to be turned off according to the processing of steps S21 to S23 of FIG. 5 performed when one game is completed. Since the timing 6 and later in FIG. 20 are the same as the timing 6 and later in FIG. 16, the description thereof will be omitted.

Note that FIG. 21 (g) has described an example in which the CZ (advantageous period) before the simulated game is maintained and the lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is also maintained. However, after the simulated game is performed and the result (missing) of the simulated game shown in FIG. 21D is notified, the CZ (advantageous period) is terminated, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off, and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off. The game identification lamp 82 may be controlled to be in a non-lighting state so that no character can be visually recognized. That is, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on (FIG. 21 (b)) by starting the simulated game in the extinguished state (FIG. 21 (a)), and then the main game after the simulated game ends. When this happens (at the end of the game in FIG. 21D), the advantageous period may be terminated and the lights may be turned off.

(About pseudo stop pattern)
In the above embodiment, as a pseudo stop pattern of the reel during the pseudo stop during the pseudo game (while the vibration control flag shown in FIGS. 7 and 16 is set), FIG. 22 (a) shows. As shown, an example (pseudo-stop pattern 1) in which a reel motor for driving the reel is slightly vibrated by outputting an excitation signal that changes the excitation phase at regular time intervals (500 msec) has been described. In the columns of the left reel motor 14L to the right reel motor 14R in FIG. 22A, the elongated rising portion after the pseudo stop operation shows a state in which the reel that is pseudo-stopped at regular time intervals (500 msec) is slightly vibrating. There is.

However, the pseudo-stop pattern of the reels that are pseudo-stop is not limited to that shown in FIG. 22 (a). For example, the pseudo stop pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22B may be used. In the pseudo stop pattern 2, an excitation signal for exciting the same exciting phase as at the time of the previous output without changing the exciting phase with respect to the reel motor for driving the reel that is pseudo-stopped at regular time intervals (500 msec). Is shown as an example of outputting. The upward arrow in the columns of the left reel motor 14L to the right reel motor 14R in FIG. 22B excites the same exciting phase as at the time of the previous output to the reel motor corresponding to the reel that is pseudo-stopped at regular time intervals (500 msec). It shows the state of outputting the excitation signal for reeling. Since the excitation signal for exciting the same excitation phase is output, the reel motor itself does not rotate, the reel itself does not vibrate, and the player cannot specify that the excitation signal is output.

Further, the pseudo stop pattern 3 shown in FIG. 22 (c) may be used. In the pseudo stop pattern 3, the pseudo stop pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22B is obtained from the time when the first reel of the reels rotated in the pseudo game is pseudo-stopped to the time when the last reel is pseudo-stopped. It is a pattern that outputs an excitation signal in the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22A from the time when the last reel is pseudo-stopped to the time when the reel is rotated after the random delay. .. Further, in the pseudo stop pattern 3, when switching from the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 2 to the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 1 triggered by the pseudo stop of the last reel, the excitation signal is output among the other reels that have already been pseudo stop. The excitation signal may be output in the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 1 to all the reels that are pseudo-stopped in accordance with the excitation timing of the reel that first reaches the timing to be performed. In the example of FIG. 22 (c), the left reel 11L and the middle reel 11M are pseudo-stopped, and finally the right reel 11R is pseudo-stopped. Of these, in accordance with the excitation timing of the middle reel 11M (timing 1 in FIG. 22C), which first reaches the timing for outputting the excitation signal, all of the left reel motor 14L to the right reel motor 14R have a pseudo stop pattern 1. The excitation signal may be output. As a result, the timing of slight vibration can be matched between the reels that are pseudo-stopped.

As the pseudo stop pattern, contrary to FIG. 22 (c), for example, from the time when the first reel of the reels rotated in the pseudo game is pseudo-stopped to the time when the last reel is pseudo-stopped. In the pattern, the excitation signal is output in the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 1, and the excitation signal is output in the mode of the pseudo stop pattern 2 from the time when the last reel is pseudo-stopped to the time when the reel is rotated after the random delay. May be provided.

(About the display start timing on the notification display)
In the above embodiment, an example of displaying the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 when the AT combination is won during AT is shown (step S14 in FIGS. 6 and 5). Further, regarding the timing at which the display is started on the notification display 60, during the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur during AT, the elapse of the wait time from the start lever operation to the start of reel rotation is determined (FIG. 5). The timing at which the wait time was determined to have elapsed in step S12) of FIG. 5 was illustrated (step S14 in FIG. 5). That is, as shown in the timing of the embodiment of FIG. 23A, the display on the notification display 60 is started when it is determined in the wait determination 1 performed after the start lever operation that the wait time has elapsed. An example was explained.

However, the elapse determination of the wait time may be performed at a predetermined timing from the start of rotation of the reel to the activation of stop rotation. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), a wait is performed at a predetermined timing from the start of reel rotation (timing 3 in FIG. 23 (a)) to the activation of stop (timing 4 in FIG. 23 (a)). The time lapse determination may be performed (weight determination 2). In this case, the weight determination 2 may be performed, for example, at the timing until any one of steps S61 to S71 in FIG. 8 is performed. Further, in the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur during AT, the display on the notification display 60 may be started when it is determined in the weight determination 2 that the wait time has elapsed. (Timing 1 in FIG. 23 (a)).

Further, the timing at which the display on the notification display 60 is started during the normal game during AT and the pseudo game does not occur is not limited to when it is determined in the wait determination that the wait time has elapsed. Regardless of the presence or absence, for example, it may be when the start lever is operated (timing 2 in FIG. 23 (a)) or when the rotation of the reel is started (timing 3 in FIG. 23 (a)). It may be when the stop is enabled (timing 4 in FIG. 23A). That is, when the process for controlling the notification display 60 (corresponding to steps S13 and S14) is set to timing 2 during the normal game during AT and the pseudo game does not occur, for example, FIG. If YES is determined in step S02 and the processes of steps S03 to S05 are performed, the timing 3 is performed when step S63 or step S69 in FIG. 8 is started, and the timing 4 is set. May be performed when YES is determined in step S71 of FIG.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the reels 11L to 11R all start rotating at the same time during a normal game in which a pseudo game does not occur has been described. However, as shown in FIG. 23 (a'), the reels 11L to 11R start rotating in a predetermined order (first, the left reel rotates, then the middle reel rotates, and finally the right reel rotates. It may be something like). In this case, the timing for starting the display on the notification display 60 during the normal game during AT and the pseudo game does not occur is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 23 (a), and is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. It may be when the reel starts to rotate for the first time (when the process corresponding to the timing a in FIG. 23 (a') and step S63 in FIG. 8 is performed), and when the reel finally starts to rotate. (When the process corresponding to the timing b in FIG. 23 (a') and step S69 in FIG. 8 is performed).

On the other hand, after the pseudo game occurs during AT, the pseudo game is set as a timing related to the start of random delay wait processing such as step S62, step S65, and step S68 in FIG. 8, which is performed only after the pseudo game. Illustrates the timing at which the start lever is operated while all reels are pseudo-stopped (it is practically impossible that the wait time has not elapsed after the end of the pseudo-game), and the notification is made at that timing. An example of starting the display on the display device 60 has been described. It can be said that the timing at which the start lever is operated in the state where all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game is the timing before the delay time is determined in the random delay processing. When the start lever is operated in a state where all reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game (when YES is determined in step S50 in FIG. 7), step S13 is not performed without going through step S12. You may try to move to.

However, the timing for starting the display of the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 after the pseudo game occurs during AT is step S62, step S65, step S68, etc. of FIG. 8, which is performed only after the pseudo game. The timing related to the start of the random delay wait process is not limited to the timing at which the start lever is operated during the simulated game, and among the random delay processes started by the start lever operation, for example, the delay in step S62. It may be after the time is determined and the measurement of the delay time is started (timing 1 in FIG. 23B), and when the delay time elapses and the rotation of the reel is started for the first time. It may be (timing 2 in FIG. 23 (b)) or when the rotation of the last reel is started (timing 3 in FIG. 23 (b)). That is, after the pseudo game occurs during AT, the process for controlling the notification display 60 (corresponding to steps S13 and S14) is delayed in step S62, for example, when timing 1 is set. It is performed after the time is determined and when the measurement of the delay time is started, when the timing 2 is set, it is performed when step S63 in FIG. 8 is started, and when the timing 3 is set, it is performed in FIG. It may be performed when step S69 is started.

Further, the timing for starting the display of the content suggesting the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 after the pseudo game occurs during AT is timing 1 or the timing of the embodiment shown in FIG. 23 (b). It is a predetermined timing up to timing 2, and is not limited to the timing related to the start or end of a specific process (for example, delay measurement starts, etc.), for example, a predetermined time (for example) after the random delay process is started. , 100 msec) may have passed.

(About the timing to start lighting the advantageous period notification lamp)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is started to light when the start lever is operated, regardless of whether it is a normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur or a pseudo game occurs. (Steps S02 and S05 in FIG. 5 and step S33 in FIG. 6). That is, in the case of notifying the advantageous operation mode during AT, as shown in the timing of the embodiment of FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), both during the normal game and when the pseudo game occurs. An example of starting lighting of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 when the start lever is operated has been described.

However, the timing at which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 starts to light is not limited to this as long as it is at least the timing until the advantageous operation mode is notified. As shown in FIG. 24A, the timing at which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 starts to light during the normal game may be the timing 1 at which the previous game of the main game for notifying the advantageous operation mode ends. The timing 1 at which the previous game is completed is when all reel rotations are stopped, when the payout process after the reel rotation is stopped, or when the bet number for the next game can be set. You may.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the timing for starting the lighting of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 when the pseudo game occurs is the timing 2 when the previous game of the game for notifying the advantageous operation mode in the main game is completed. It may be the timing 3 in which all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, and the timing 4 in which the start lever for ending the pseudo-game and shifting to the main game is operated (introduction operation). The timing 4 may be any timing until the content suggesting the mode of the stop operation is notified in this game. For example, the random delay processing shown in steps S61 to S69 of FIG. 8 is started or started. It may be a related timing when it is done. Specifically, as the timing 4, the timing at which the start lever for ending the pseudo game and starting the reel rotation of the main game is operated to start the random delay process and the delay time are determined in step S62. It may be later when the measurement of the delay time is started (see timing 1 in FIG. 25 (b) described later), and when the delay time elapses and the rotation of the reel is started for the first time (described later). (Refer to timing 2 of FIG. 25 (b), when step S63 of FIG. 8 is performed), and when the rotation of the last reel is started (see timing 3 of FIG. 25 (b) described later). It may be (when step S69 of FIG. 8 is performed) or the like. Further, the timing 2 at which the previous game is completed is when all reel rotations are stopped, when the payout process after the reel rotation is stopped is completed, or when the bet number for the next game can be set. You may.

(About the timing related to the pseudo game specific notification)
In the above embodiment, as shown in the timing of the embodiment of FIG. 25A, an example of starting the pseudo game specific notification when the start lever for starting the game for generating the pseudo game is operated is shown. (Steps S02 and S11 in FIG. 5, steps S41 in FIG. 7, and steps S105 and S106 in FIG. 14). However, the timing for starting the pseudo-game specific notification is not limited to the timing related to the start of the pseudo-game, and for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the timing at which the rotation of the reel in the pseudo-game is started. It may be 1, the timing 2 when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the timing 3 when the pseudo stop operation is enabled, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in the timing of the embodiment of FIG. 25B, the pseudo game is specified when the start lever for ending the pseudo game and starting the reel rotation of the main game is operated. An example of terminating the notification is shown (steps S50 and S51 in FIG. 7, steps S108 and S109 in FIG. 14). However, if the timing for starting the pseudo-game specific notification is the timing related to the start or the start of the random delay processing shown in steps S61 to S69 of FIG. 8, the pseudo-game is terminated and the main game is started. Of the random delay processing started by the start lever operation, the delay time is determined, for example, in step S62, not limited to the timing when the start lever for starting the reel rotation of the above is operated to start the random delay processing. It may be later when the measurement of the delay time is started (timing 1 in FIG. 25 (b)), and when the delay time elapses and the rotation of the reel is started for the first time (FIG. 25 (b)). ), When step S63 of FIG. 8 is performed), and when the rotation of the last reel is started (when timing 3 of FIG. 25B, step S69 of FIG. 8 is performed). ), Or when the stop is enabled (when the timing 4 in FIG. 25B and the step S72 in FIG. 8 are performed).

(About the image of the pseudo game specific notification)
In the above embodiment, as an image of the pseudo-game specific notification, an example of scrolling a character image such as "during pseudo-game" in a band-shaped band region along the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIG. 26 has been described. .. The outer periphery of the band region is surrounded by a single color such as black, and is defined at a position that does not overlap with the edge (for example, the lower side) of the display region of the liquid crystal display 27. Further, the relationship between the length L of the band region, the length M of the character image to be scrolled, and the interval N of the character images is defined to be (M + N) ≦ L / 2.

<Examples of technical matters and effects of slot machine 1>
(1-1) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. In such a gaming machine, when a start operation or the like for starting one game is performed, an advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means. However, in such a gaming machine, when performing a pseudo game that is an effect using a reel, an advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means at the same timing (or the same opportunity, etc.) as when the pseudo game is not performed. If this happens, the player may be misunderstood as if it were a real game despite being a pseudo game, and it would be unclear whether it is a pseudo game or a main game, causing confusion. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 and the like, at the time of the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur, at any of the timings exemplified in FIG. 23 (a) (hereinafter referred to as the first timing). While the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is started, after the pseudo game occurs, the random delay wait processing such as step S62, step S65, and step S68 in FIG. 8 is performed instead of the first timing. The display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is started at any timing (hereinafter referred to as the second timing) exemplified in FIG. 23B, which is a timing related to the start.

As a result, the timing (trigger) for starting the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 can be different between the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur and the time after the pseudo game occurs. Further, when the pseudo game occurs, the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is not started at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being misunderstood or confused as if it were a real game even though it is a pseudo game. Further, after the pseudo game occurs, it is advantageous in the notification display 60 at least in the preparation stage of the main game related to the random delay process preparing to start the main game and at least until the stop is enabled. The display of the operation mode is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing the stop operation first by the time the display of the advantageous operation mode is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being reduced.

Further, when the first timing is stopped and enabled (timing 4 in FIG. 23A), in a normal game in which a pseudo game does not occur, an advantageous operation on the notification display 60 is performed when the stop is enabled. Since the display of the mode is started, the player can smoothly perform the game (stop operation) according to the display immediately before the operation. Further, if it is after the end of the pseudo game, the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is started in accordance with the start of the random delay, so that the next stop is given to the player who has ended the pseudo game. It is possible to notify in advance that the stop operation to the switch is an operation for which stop is enabled in this game, and it is possible to notify in advance that it is not a pseudo game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the stop operation in the main game due to the inertia of the pseudo game.

Further, if the advantageous operation mode is notified at the first timing even after the pseudo game is completed, the advantageous operation mode is notified at a timing later than the first timing without the pseudo game. As a result, there arises a problem that the speed of the game progress in the game becomes slow and it becomes difficult to proceed with the game at a good tempo. In order to solve such a problem, after the pseudo game is completed, the advantageous operation mode is notified at the second timing, which is earlier than the first timing accompanied by the pseudo game, so that the speed of the game progress is slowed down. It is possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo while suppressing the situation as much as possible.

(1-2) In relation to the above (1-1), the second timing is the timing until the delay time is determined in the random delay processing (for example, the timing of the embodiment of FIG. 23B, or the timing 1). If so, the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is started as soon as the pseudo game is completed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of relief at an early timing. In addition, since the advantageous operation mode is notified at an early stage, the stop operation can be immediately performed in the advantageous operation mode when the main stop is enabled after the pseudo game is completed, so that the game progress speed is prevented from being delayed. be able to.

(1-3) In relation to the above (1-1), when the second timing is the timing at which the rotation of the reel is first started after the delay time has elapsed (timing 2 in FIG. 23B). Or, when the timing at which the reel rotation is finally started after the delay time has elapsed (timing 3 in FIG. 23B), the notification display 60 is set according to the reel rotation start timing after the simulated game is completed. The display of the advantageous operation mode in is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable as compared with the case where the display of the advantageous operation mode on the notification display 60 is suddenly started without any operation.

Further, when the second timing is the timing at which the reel rotation is finally started after the delay time has elapsed (timing 3 in FIG. 23B), the rotation of all the reels that have been pseudo-stopped is started. By notifying the advantageous operation mode at the timing when the game is to be performed, the advantageous operation mode is notified at the timing when it can be surely grasped that the pseudo game ends and the main game starts. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the advantageous operation mode while grasping the end of the pseudo game and the start of the main game accompanying the end.

(2-1) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies a player of an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. In such a gaming machine, when a start operation or the like for starting one game is performed, an advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means. However, in such a gaming machine, in the case of performing a pseudo game which is an effect using a reel, if the advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means as in the case where the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game is performed. In spite of this, there is a risk that the player may be misunderstood as if it were a real game, or it may be unclear whether it is a pseudo game or a main game, which may lead to confusion.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, in the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur during AT (for example, the game of the “N-1 game” in FIG. 16), While the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27 may each notify the mode of the stop operation, during the simulated game (for example, the simulated game of "N game" in FIG. 16). In the liquid crystal display 27, the mode of the stop operation may be notified, but in the notification display 60, the mode of the stop operation may not be notified, and the book after the pseudo game is completed. In a game (for example, the main game of "N game" in FIG. 16), the mode of the stop operation may be notified even on the notification display 60.

As a result, the advantageous operation mode is not displayed on the notification display 60 even during AT during the simulated game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being misunderstood or confused as if it were a real game even though it is a pseudo game. Further, in the main game after the pseudo game is completed, the advantageous operation mode may be displayed on the notification display 60 when the AT combination or the like is won, which reduces the profit of the player. Can be prevented. On the other hand, even during the simulated game, the liquid crystal display 27 may perform a navigation effect on the sub side, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2-2) As shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (d), the mode of the stop operation notified by the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game of the “N game” (2-2). Pushing order 321) and the mode of the stop operation notified by the notification display 60 in the main game after the pseudo game is completed (“6” is displayed, “6” is the pushing order from FIG. 6B). Even if 321) shows the same content, the notification display 60 may not notify the mode of the stop operation during the pseudo game of "N game", and the pseudo game of "N game" is not performed. The notification display 60 may notify the mode of the stop operation at the timing (see FIG. 23B) when the random delay processing is started even after the end.

As a result, regardless of the mode of the stop operation to be notified, the mode of the stop operation is not notified on the notification display 60 during the simulated game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood and causing confusion. Further, after the pseudo game is completed, the notification display 60 may notify the mode of the stop operation at the timing when the random delay processing, which is the preparation stage of the main game, is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing the stop operation first by the time the mode of the stop operation is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being reduced.

(3-1) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. In such a gaming machine, there is one that notifies that it is possible to notify an advantageous operation mode. However, in such a gaming machine, in the case of performing a pseudo game which is an effect using a reel, if the advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means as in the case where the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game is performed. However, there is a risk that the player may be misunderstood as if it were a real game, or it may be unclear whether it is a pseudo game or a main game, which may lead to confusion. In addition, there was no focus on how to control the notification that an advantageous operation mode can be notified during the simulated game, and no study was made.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, during the advantageous period, as shown in FIG. 16, during the AT game or the like, the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27 each notify the mode of the stop operation. When there is a case where the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is lit (see “N-1 game” in FIG. 16), and the AT game is in progress and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is lit. Even so, during the simulated game, the notification display 60 does not notify the mode of the stop operation, but the lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is continued (“N game th” in FIG. 16). In this game after the pseudo game is completed, the notification display 60 may notify the mode of the stop operation (see “N game” in FIG. 16 during the main game). There is.

As a result, during the AT game, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is maintained in the lit state even during the simulated game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the AT game may have ended by ending the lighting state of the advantageous period notification lamp 80. On the other hand, during the simulated game, the notification display 60 does not notify the mode of the stop operation, and after the simulated game ends, the notification display 60 may notify the mode of the stop operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as if it is the main game or causing confusion even though the game is being simulated. Further, since the mode of the stop operation can be notified after the pseudo game is completed, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being reduced.

(3-2) Further, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, even during a normal game or the like, the liquid crystal display 27 may notify the mode of the stop operation during the simulated game. On the other hand, the mode of the stop operation is not notified on the notification display 60, and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not turned on (in the "N game" of FIG. 18). See pseudo-games).

As a result, even during a normal game, the liquid crystal display 27 may notify the mode of the stop operation during the simulated game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. On the other hand, even during a normal game and the liquid crystal display 27 notifies the mode of the stop operation, the notification display 60 may not notify the mode of the stop operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as if it is the main game or causing confusion even though the game is being simulated. Further, even during a normal game and the liquid crystal display 27 notifies the mode of the stop operation, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 may not be turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the shift to AT or the like may occur.

(4) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies a player of an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. However, in such a gaming machine, in the case of performing a pseudo game which is an effect using a reel, if the advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means as in the case where the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game is performed. However, there is a risk that the player may be misunderstood as if it were a real game, or it may be unclear whether it is a pseudo game or a main game, which may lead to confusion. In addition, when a simulated game is performed, there is no focus on how to specify an advantageous operation mode to be notified, and no study has been made.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the value specified in step S35 of FIG. 6A is stored in the push order buffer, and the value stored in step S14 of FIG. 5 is acquired and displayed at least for notification. The mode of the stop operation to be notified in the device 60 is specified. Further, when the pseudo game does not occur during AT, the mode of the stop operation may be notified on each of the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27, for example, as in the “N-1 game” in FIG. To do so. Further, when the pseudo game occurs even when the mode of the stop operation is notified, the value specified in step S35 of FIG. 6A is stored in the push order buffer before the pseudo game is started, and the pseudo game is simulated. While the notification display 60 does not notify the mode of the stop operation during the game, the value of the push order buffer is held, and the value of the push order buffer held in step S14 of FIG. 5 after the pseudo game is completed. The mode of the stop operation specified from the above is notified on the notification display 60.

As a result, the mode of the stop operation is not notified on the notification display 60 even during the AT or during the simulated game. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as if it is the main game or causing confusion even though the game is being simulated. On the other hand, after the pseudo game is completed, the value specified and stored in step S35 of FIG. 6A before the pseudo game is started, and is retained at least while the pseudo game is being performed. The mode of the stop operation based on the value of the push order buffer is notified on the notification display 60. Therefore, the processing load for notifying the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 can be distributed before the start of the pseudo game and after the end of the pseudo game. Further, since the value of the push order buffer specified before the start of the pseudo game is used, the value for specifying the mode of the stop operation multiple times such as before the start of the pseudo game and after the end of the pseudo game is used as the AT role. There is no need to perform specific processing based on this, and the processing load can be reduced.

(5-1) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. Further, in such a gaming machine, there are those that notify that an advantageous operation mode can be notified and those that perform a pseudo game that is an effect using a reel. However, there was no focus on the timing of notifying or ending the fact that an advantageous operation mode can be notified, and the timing of starting or ending the simulated game, and no study was made. ..

Therefore, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment includes a plurality of pseudo-game modes in which it is possible to specify that the pseudo-game is in progress, and other modes in which it is possible to specify that the pseudo-game has ended or that the pseudo-game is not in progress. A game identification lamp 82 and a liquid crystal display 27 (hereinafter, also referred to as a game identification lamp 82 and the like) are provided so that any one of the types can be notified. Then, with respect to the game specifying lamp 82 and the like, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the start lever operation for starting the simulated game and the timing related to the start lever operation (timing and timing 1 to 3 of the embodiment). Each) triggers the pseudo-game specific notification, and as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the start lever operation for ending the pseudo-game and the timing related to the start lever operation (timing and timings 1 to 4 of the embodiment). Each) was used as an opportunity to end the pseudo-game specific notification. On the other hand, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is in a lit state triggered by the start lever operation, as shown in the timing of the embodiment of FIG. 24 (a) and the timing and timing 4 of the embodiment of FIG. 24 (b). As shown in step S23 of FIG. 5, the timing based on the stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R while only one of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating in the game for ending the advantageous period. After (YES in step S17), the lights are turned off at the timing until the game end processing (for example, the processing of steps S19, S20, etc.) is completed.

As a result, when the start lever is operated, the player is expected to both that the pseudo game identification lamp 82 and the like perform the pseudo game identification notification and that the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is lit. Can be embraced. On the other hand, since the timing at which the pseudo game identification notification ends in the game identification lamp 82 and the like and the timing at which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off are different, the pseudo game ends and the advantageous period ends. It is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being greatly discouraged because both of them are notified at the same time. Further, it is possible to disperse the attention of the player to each of the game specifying lamp 82 and the like and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 in a timely manner, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses them.

(5-2) Further, FIG. 24 shows another example in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on, for example, timing 1 in FIG. 24 (a) and timing 2 in FIG. 24 (b). As shown in 3, the reels 11L to 11R are turned on at a timing different from the start lever operation that can start the pseudo game specific notification, and as shown in step S23 of FIG. 5, in the game that ends the advantageous period. After the timing based on the stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reel while only one of the reels is rotating (YES in step S17), the game end processing (for example, processing of steps S19, S20, etc.) ) Is also shown as an example in which the light is turned off at the timing until the completion.

In this case, since the timing at which the pseudo-game specific notification is performed on the game identification lamp 82 or the like and the timing at which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on are different, there is an expectation that the pseudo-game will be started and an advantage. It is possible to disperse the period and the expectation that AT will be started in a timely manner. Further, since the timing at which the pseudo game specific notification ends and the timing at which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off are different in the game identification lamp 82 or the like, both the pseudo game ends and the advantageous period ends. Is notified at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being greatly discouraged. Further, it is possible to disperse the attention of the player to each of the game specifying lamp 82 and the like and the advantageous period notification lamp 80 in a timely manner, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses them.

(5-3) Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that notifies an operation mode advantageous to a player by a notification means controlled by a main control means. However, in such a gaming machine, in the case of performing a pseudo game which is an effect using a reel, if the advantageous operation mode is notified by the notification means as in the case where the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game is performed. However, there is a risk that the player may be misunderstood as if it were a real game, or it may be unclear whether it is a pseudo game or a main game, which may lead to confusion.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the timing of notifying the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 when the specific condition that triggers the execution of the pseudo game is satisfied during AT is set in FIG. As shown in the pseudo-game of "N game", the timing related to the start of the random delay process after the end of the pseudo-game is not the timing that overlaps with the timing at which the pseudo-game identification notification is performed on the game identification lamp 82 or the like. (Timing, timings 1 to 3 and the like in the embodiment of FIG. 23 (b)). In this case, the timing for ending the pseudo-game specific notification is the timing of the embodiment in FIG. 25 (b), and is not the timing 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 25 (b).

As a result, even though the pseudo game identification notification is performed on the game identification lamp 82 or the like, the notification display 60 does not notify the mode of the stop operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being misunderstood or confused as if it were a real game even though it is a pseudo game. Further, after the pseudo game is completed, the stop operation is performed on the notification display 60 at least in the preparation stage of the main game related to the random delay process preparing to start the main game and at least until the stop is enabled. The aspect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing the stop operation first by the time the mode of the stop operation is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being reduced.

(5-4) In the above (5-3), the timing at which the navigation effect is performed on the liquid crystal display 27 in correspondence with the display of the mode of the stop operation on the notification display 60 is set to “N” in FIG. As shown in the pseudo-game of "Game Eye", the timing related to the start of the random delay process after the end of the pseudo-game is not the timing that overlaps with the timing at which the pseudo-game identification notification is performed on the game identification lamp 82 or the like ( Step S126 of FIG. 15, timing related to (corresponding to) the start of random delay processing after the end of the pseudo game, for example, the timing at which reel rotation is started, the timing at which reel rotation is started and the steady rotation speed is reached. , One of the timings such as the timing when the stop operation is enabled).

As a result, the liquid crystal display 27 does not notify the mode of the stop operation even though the pseudo game identification notification is performed on the game identification lamp 82. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being misunderstood or confused as if it were a real game even though it is a pseudo game. Further, after the pseudo game is completed, the mode of the stop operation on the liquid crystal display 2 is at least in the preparation stage of the main game related to the random delay process preparing to start the main game and at least until the stop is enabled. Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing the stop operation first by the time the mode of the stop operation is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being reduced.

(6) In the above slot machine 1, as shown in steps S09 to S11 of FIG. 5, the pseudo game is not in the bonus and when the set number of bets is not 2 bets (specifically, 3 bets). It becomes feasible at the time of betting). When a bonus is in progress or when the set number of bets is two, it is determined to be YES in step S09, so that the pseudo game is executed even if a specific condition is satisfied. Not done. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it possible to execute the pseudo game in a state other than during the bonus. In addition, it is possible to recommend a three-card betting game to the player so that the pseudo game is executed. Further, in this case, during the two-card bet or during the bonus, the player cannot expect much acquisition of the game medium as compared with the three-card bet, and the pseudo game does not occur in the low expectation state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent such dissatisfaction in advance for the purpose of preventing the dissatisfaction that the player has by inciting the expectation by the pseudo game in the low expectation state.

(7) In the slot machine 1 described above, with respect to the image of the pseudo-game specific notification displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the pseudo-game, as described with reference to FIG. 26, a character image such as "during pseudo-game" is displayed. The outer periphery of the band area to be scrolled is surrounded by a single color such as black, and is further defined at a position that does not overlap with the edge (for example, the lower side) of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. This makes it possible to prevent the image of the pseudo-game specific notification from blending into the background of the game screen and making it difficult to confirm.

Further, the relationship between the length L of the band region, the length M of the character image to be scrolled, and the interval N of the character images is defined to be (M + N) ≦ L / 2. Therefore, in the pseudo game specific notification image, regardless of the scroll position of the character image, the scrolled character image is displayed from the start point (suspicion) to the end point (middle) of the character image. The existing character image will always be included. As a result, the entire character image can be visually recognized by the player regardless of the scrolling timing. In a gaming machine where a pseudo game may be executed in a conventional gaming machine, the difference between the pseudo game and the main game should be clearly understood so that the pseudo game and the main game are not mistaken for each other. However, by devising the display mode of the image of the pseudo-game specific notification as described in (7), it is possible to prevent misidentification.

(8) In the slot machine 1 described above, as shown in FIG. 15, it is possible to execute a navigation effect or the like during a simulated game (step S121), and the navigation is possible even during a normal game in which the simulated game does not occur. The effect can be executed (step S126). As shown in steps S130 and S131, the navigation effect during the normal game ends when the operation error occurs. On the other hand, in the navigation effect and the like during the simulated game, the processing corresponding to steps S130 and S131 is not performed between steps S122 to S124, so even if an operation error occurs, the navigation effect and the like will continue thereafter. continue. That is, it is stipulated that the navigation effect during the simulated game can be handled differently from the navigation effect during the normal game. Conventionally, there has been a demand for an increase in the player's willingness to participate in a pseudo-game in a gaming machine in which a pseudo-game may be executed. As a result, variations such as navigation effects displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by making the mode of the navigation effect different, the difference between the pseudo game and the main game (normal game) can be grasped by the difference in the navigation effect.

(9) In the above slot machine 1, the values of various counters used for calculating the advantageous period stay ratio, the bonus ratio, the bonus status ratio, the indicated bonus ratio, etc. are updated, and the advantageous period stay is concerned. The ratio, the bonus ratio, the bonus state ratio, the designated bonus ratio, etc. are not calculated during the pseudo game process in step S11, the reel activation process (including the random delay process) in step S15, or the like. , As shown in step S20 of FIG. 5, this is performed in the processing after all the reels have stopped (for example, the payout processing). As a result, the processing load can be distributed. Conventionally, the pseudo game is performed as a part of the main game, but when the number of games, the payout, and the number of games are updated by the pseudo stop in the pseudo game or the display result stopped by the pseudo stop, various counters display accurate values. Where there is a risk that counting and calculation will not be possible, it is possible to prevent such a risk by not updating various counters in the simulated game.

(10) In the above-mentioned slot machine 1, an embodiment (FIG.) of notifying that the stop enable lamp, which is an LED mounted inside the operation unit of each of the stop switches 21L to 21R, is stopped and enabled during the main game. Step S72) of 8 is different from the mode of notifying that the stop is enabled during the simulated game (step S44 of FIG. 7). It is required to clearly understand the difference between the pseudo game and the main game so that the pseudo game and the main game are not misunderstood in the game machine where the conventional pseudo game may be executed. However, this makes it possible to prevent misunderstandings and confusion as if it were a main game even though it is a pseudo game, even from the aspect of the stoptable lamp.

(11) The game identification lamp 82 that performs pseudo game identification notification in the slot machine 1 can notify that AT is in progress or CZ vaginal cum shot is in progress by changing the lighting mode. Conventionally, it has been required to clearly understand the difference between the pseudo game and the main game so that the pseudo game and the main game are not misunderstood in the game machine where the pseudo game may be executed. However, this makes it possible to effectively utilize the limited space of the front door 5 while being equipped with the game specifying lamp 82 that can clearly grasp that the game is a pseudo game.

(12) In the above slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 22A and the like, while the reels are pseudo-stopped, the random delay processing is started and the reel rotation is delayed. Also outputs an excitation signal at regular intervals to cause slight vibrations. Conventionally, reel control different from that of the main game has been required during the simulated game, and as a result, the player has been pseudo-stopped until the reel rotation is actually started in the main game. You can notify that.

(13) In the slot machine 1 described above, when a navigation effect or the like is executed during the simulated game shown in FIG. 21 (b) and a stop operation matching the navigation effect or the like is performed (in FIG. 21). BAR alignment: at the time of success), as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the mode of the stop operation is displayed on the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27, whereas the stop operation that matches the navigation effect and the like is displayed. When the above cannot be performed (BAR irregularity in FIG. 21: failure), as shown in FIG. 21 (f), the mode of the stop operation is displayed on the notification display 60 at the start of the random delay, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. After the resurrection notification is performed on the display 27, the process shifts to FIG. 21 (e). Conventionally, it has been required to improve the player's willingness to participate in the simulated game. This can prevent the player from having an advantage / disadvantage depending on the mode of the stop operation during the simulated game, and at the time of failure. Even so, the expectation for a resurrection can be maintained.

(14) In the slot machine 1 described above, a pseudo game can be executed even during a normal game during a non-random game period in which the payout rate is less than 1 (see FIG. 18), and the payout rate is 1 or more. When a pseudo game is executed during AT, which is the payout period, a notification display is displayed at a timing related to the start of random delay processing, as shown in "N game" in FIG. 16 and FIG. 23 (b). The mode of the stop operation is displayed on the device 60. Conventionally, there has been a demand for ingenuity in the utilization of simulated games, and this suggests that it is a ball-out period.

(15) In the slot machine 1 described above, when the power is cut off and restored during the simulated game, it is determined in step S61 or the like of FIG. 8 that the power is restored during the simulated game, and a random delay such as step S62 is performed. Wait processing is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the stop activation in this game from being performed while the positional relationship of the reels maintains a predetermined relationship. Further, as shown in step S47 of FIG. 7, during the pseudo game, the pseudo game can be terminated in the middle by performing the pseudo cancel operation. Also in this case, it is determined in step S61 and the like in FIG. 8 that the game is after the pseudo game, and the random delay process is performed in the same manner as after the power failure is restored during the pseudo game. In conventional gaming machines, it is required to reduce the processing load. This enables pseudo-cancellation without adding new processing, and the positional relationship of the reels remains even after the pseudo-cancellation. It is possible to prevent the stop activation in this game from being performed while maintaining a predetermined relationship.

(16) In the above slot machine 1, as shown in steps S48 and S49 of FIG. 7, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes or the like) has elapsed from the start of the simulated game, the rotating reel is forced. Pseudo stop. When the pseudo stop is forcibly stopped, the pseudo stop is performed in the optimum manner for the player. Conventionally, there is a risk that the pseudo game will be prolonged and affect the progress of the main game, but this will not cause any disadvantage to the player, but the progress of the game will be performed by the pseudo game. Can be prevented from becoming stagnant.

(17) In the slot machine 1 described above, as shown in step S109 of FIG. 14, when the simulated game is completed, the game specifying lamp 82 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the state before the start of the simulated game. As a result, when the state before the start of the pseudo game is during AT, it is controlled in the AT mode, and when the state before the start of the pseudo game is advantageous and general, it is controlled to the non-lighting state.

(18) In the slot machine 1 described above, as shown in FIG. 25, the end timing of the pseudo game specific notification is the timing at which the start lever is operated (the timing before the random delay processing is started). Not limited to this, any of the timings 1 to 4 related to the operation of the start lever may be used. As a result, even after the random delay processing is started, the pseudo-game specific notification can be continuously displayed, so that the expectation for the continuation of the pseudo-game (second pseudo-game, etc.) can be maintained. can.

(19) In the above slot machine 1, as described in FIG. 17 (c), as the image displayed when the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, only the symbol stopped on the winning line NL is displayed. However, it is permissible to display an image related to a symbol that has not been stopped on the winning line NL. On the other hand, when the symbol combination is displayed in this game, it is possible to display the image related to the symbol stopped on the winning line NL, but the image related to the symbol not stopped on the winning line NL can be displayed. It cannot be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the image displayed when the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.

(20) In the above slot machine 1, when it is determined in steps S123 and S124 of FIG. 15 that a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed from the previous operation during the simulated game, "let's make a pseudo stop! ”, Which is a pseudo-stop operation promotion effect. On the other hand, in steps S128 and S129 of FIG. 15, when it is determined that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from the previous operation during the main game, a stop operation such as "Let's stop the reels!" A promotion effect (a mode different from the pseudo stop operation promotion effect) is performed. Conventionally, it has been required not to misidentify a pseudo game and a main game, but this causes a misunderstanding as if it is a main game even though it is a pseudo game even by a promotion effect. It is possible to prevent it from being embraced or causing confusion. The mode of the pseudo stop operation promotion effect and the mode of the stop operation promotion effect may be the same.

(21) In the above slot machine 1, a game identification lamp 82, which is a device different from the advantageous period notification lamp 60, is mounted, and the game identification lamp 82 performs pseudo game identification notification. Conventionally, it has been required not to misidentify a pseudo game and a main game, but this is advantageous because it becomes a dedicated device for notifying the advantageous period notification lamp 60 that it is an advantageous period. It is possible to prevent problems such as the player becoming difficult to understand whether or not it is a period.

<About various productions>
In the slot machine 1, various effects are executed according to the progress of the game. The sub CPU 71 executes various effects by using the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps, the speakers 31L, 31R, and the like based on the command from the main CPU 61 according to the progress of the game.

The various effects include, for example, an expectation suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that an AT winning, the number of AT games, stock, and other benefits that are advantageous to the player are given, and information on the granting of the privilege (for example, the privilege). Includes a winning notification effect that notifies (whether or not is given). FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the expectation degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the expectation degree suggestion effect (specific effect, for example, the effect over a plurality of (8 times) games) is executed according to the progress of the game to suggest the expectation degree, and then the result is lost. At the predetermined result notification timing (specific timing, for example, at the time of the third stop operation of the third game), the notification effect (special effect, for example, the effect over a plurality of (three times) games) is executed. The result of whether or not the privilege is granted is notified. The expectation degree suggestion effect is, for example, performed over a plurality of (10 times) games, but is not limited to this, and may be completed in one game.

It should be noted that the number of games for executing the expectation degree suggestion effect is, for example, over eight games, but is not limited to this, and a plurality of predetermined number of types of games (for example, eight, 16 and 32 times). , 33 times, etc.) may be determined by lottery (for example, random number lottery), and the expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed over the determined number of games. Further, in the lottery for determining the number of games of the expectation degree suggestion effect, any number of games may be determined according to a predetermined distribution rate regardless of whether or not the privilege is given. Further, in the lottery for determining the number of games of the expectation suggestion effect, one of the games is determined according to the distribution rate according to whether or not the privilege is given, that is, the degree of expectation that the privilege is given. The number of games may be determined accordingly. Further, in the lottery for determining the number of games of the expectation suggestion effect, any number of games may be determined according to the distribution rate according to whether or not the privilege is confirmed. , The number of games that can be determined only when the privilege is given may be provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's expectation according to the number of games in which the winning notification effect is executed.

Further, the winning notification effect is performed, for example, over a plurality of games (three times, the number of games less than the expected degree suggestion effect, etc.), but is not limited to this, and is completed in one game. May be good. In addition, the number of games for executing the winning notification effect is determined by lottery (for example, random number lottery) from among a plurality of predetermined types of games (for example, 3 times, 4 times, etc.). The winning notification effect may be executed over the determined number of games. Further, in the lottery for determining the number of games for the winning notification effect, any number of games may be determined according to a predetermined distribution rate regardless of whether or not the privilege is given. In addition, in the lottery that determines the number of games for the winning notification effect, the number of games is determined according to the distribution rate according to whether or not the privilege is given, that is, according to the degree of expectation that the privilege is given. The number of games may be determined, or any number of games may be determined according to the distribution rate according to whether or not the privilege is given. In the lottery for determining the number of games for the winning notification effect, for example, it may be determined three times when the privilege is not granted, and may be determined four times only when the privilege is granted. As a result, when the winning notification effect continues over the fourth game, the privilege grant can be confirmed and notified. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's expectation according to the number of games in which the winning notification effect is executed.

First, the expectation suggestion effect will be described. The expectation degree suggestion effect in the present embodiment is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the progress of the game. Predetermined conditions are, for example, predetermined winning combination groups (for example, "SB", "A_LC1" to "B_RC2", "CH", "WM1", "WM2", which can grant benefits such as AT in the combination lottery. It may be established by winning "SP1", "SP2", "BE", etc.), and further, it may be established by winning by a random number lottery when winning these winning combination groups. Alternatively, the game may be established when the number of digested games reaches a predetermined number of times. If it is possible to control advantageous conditions such as so-called bonuses, regular bonuses, and challenge bonuses, the predetermined conditions are established by winning these bonuses or by winning a role that can be won at the same time in the bonus and the role lottery. It may be something to do.

During the expectation suggestion effect, a predetermined effect is advanced (for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27) in an area including the central region of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27, and the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. One of a plurality of types of frame images is displayed in the outer peripheral area surrounding the central area of the display area (for example, surrounding all four sides), and the degree of expectation is suggested according to the type of the frame image. The frame image is defined so that the display color as the base tone differs depending on the type. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the plurality of types of frame images include a frame image whose basic display color is a rainbow color, a red frame image, and a blue frame as shown in FIG. 27 (b). An image is provided. The plurality of types of frame images may be images that are transparent and can be visually recognized as an image displayed on the back surface (for example, an image of an expectation degree suggestion effect), and when displayed in the outer peripheral region. Even if there is a transparent part (a part that is not colored, a gap part), it is an image that makes it possible to visually recognize an image displayed on the back surface (for example, an image of an expectation degree suggestion effect) through the transparent part. You may. As described above, the effect such as the expectation suggestion effect that can be executed in the area including the central area of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 can be said to be the main effect. Further, since the frame image is executed in the outer peripheral region, it can be said to be a sub-effect. Further, as will be described later, an effect such as an expectation degree suggestion effect, which is the main effect, may be executed by the effect alone, but a frame image, which is a sub effect, may not be executed by the frame image alone. The sub-effect is performed together with the main effect.

27 (c) to 27 (e) are views showing an outer peripheral region and a display example of a frame image displayed in the outer peripheral region. As shown in FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (e), as the frame image, an effect image based on a color according to the type is displayed in the outer peripheral regions on all four sides surrounding the central region of the liquid crystal display 27. .. In FIG. 27 (c), a frame image based on rainbow colors (a first-class effect image, hereinafter also referred to as a rainbow-colored frame image) is shown by a downward-sloping diagonal line portion in the outer peripheral region. The rainbow color is a color including seven colors such as red and blue. In FIG. 27 (d), a frame image based on red (a second type of effect image, hereinafter referred to as a red frame image) is shown by a dark gray portion in the outer peripheral region. In FIG. 27 (e), a frame image based on blue (a third type of effect image, hereinafter referred to as a blue frame image) is shown by a light gray portion in the outer peripheral region.

Further, when the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs (partially or) so as to emit light in a rainbow-colored frame image (for example, rainbow-colored) corresponding to the rainbow-colored frame image. All) are controlled, and the speaker is controlled so that the sound effect corresponding to the rainbow-colored frame image is output. On the other hand, when the red frame image or the blue frame image is displayed among the frame images, various lamps / LEDs and speakers are controlled in the same manner as when the frame image is not displayed, regardless of the type of the frame image. (Control is maintained until the frame image is displayed).

In the expectation degree suggestion effect, a character or the like appears to advance a predetermined effect, and on the liquid crystal display 27, the frame image shown in FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (e) is superimposed on the image of the predetermined effect. Expectation is suggested by superimposing and displaying. The rainbow-colored frame image is an image suggesting that the privilege is given by being displayed (for example, an image having an expectation of 100%), that is, a winning confirmation image. On the other hand, the red frame image is an image (for example, an image having an expectation degree of 60%) that suggests a first degree of expectation for the privilege being given by being displayed. Further, the blue frame image is an image (for example, an image having an expectation degree of 20%) suggesting a second expectation degree lower than the first expectation degree for the privilege being given by being displayed. .. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the frame image is set to have a relationship such as rainbow color frame image> red frame image> blue frame image> frame image non-display.

The frame image is defined in three types, and an example in which the degree of expectation is divided into four stages when the frame image non-display is included will be described, but not limited to this, four or more types are defined and the frame image is not displayed. If is included, the degree of expectation may be divided into 5 or more stages. The degree of expectation may be set so as to be, for example, rainbow color frame image> red frame image> green frame image> blue frame image> frame image non-display. Further, for example, a white frame image may be provided instead of hiding the frame image, and the frame image of any color may be displayed from the start of the expected degree suggestion effect. In this case, the expected degree may be displayed. It may be defined as rainbow color frame image> red frame image> green frame image> blue frame image> white frame image. Further, the frame image may be an image that mainly includes an image including a display color as a base tone, and may be, for example, a still image or a moving image that sways and shakes. Further, FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (e) show an example in which the boundary between the outer peripheral region and the central region where the frame image is displayed (which is also the boundary on the center side of the frame image) is linear. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the boundary between the outer peripheral region and the central region (the boundary on the central side of the frame image) may be uneven or curved, and is not limited to a fixed one. It may be something that can change with the passage of time (especially when the frame image is a moving image or the like).

In addition, during the expectation suggestion effect, the frame image may be switched to a type of frame image having a high expectation. 27 (f) to 27 (h) are diagrams for explaining a pattern for a frame image. FIG. 27 (f) shows pattern A (winning confirmation) when the rainbow-colored frame image having the highest expectation is displayed at the end of the expectation suggestion effect. In pattern A, the frame image is hidden → the blue frame image → the red frame image → the rainbow color frame image is switched to the pattern A1 and the frame image is not displayed → the red frame image → the rainbow color frame image is switched to during the expectation degree suggestion effect. Pattern A2, frame image non-display → blue frame image → pattern A3 that switches to rainbow color frame image, and pattern A4 that first displays the blue frame image and switches to the blue frame image → red frame image → rainbow color frame image. , The pattern A5 in which the red frame image is first displayed and switched from the red frame image to the rainbow color frame image and the pattern A6 in which the blue frame image is first displayed and switched from the blue frame image to the rainbow color frame image are included. Is done. In this way, until the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed, at least one of the blue frame image and the red frame image is displayed.

FIG. 27 (g) shows a pattern B (high expectation) when a red frame image suggesting the first expectation is displayed at the end of the expectation suggestion effect. The pattern B includes a pattern B1 that switches from the frame image non-display to the blue frame image to the red frame image, a pattern B2 that switches from the frame image non-display to the red frame image, and the blue frame image first during the expectation degree suggestion effect. It includes a pattern B3 that is displayed and switches from the blue frame image to the red frame image, and a pattern B4 in which the red frame image is first displayed and then maintained without switching. As described above, until the red frame image is displayed, the blue frame image may or may not be displayed.

FIG. 27 (h) shows a pattern C (low expectation) when a blue frame image suggesting a second expectation is displayed at the end of the expectation suggestion effect. The pattern C includes a pattern C1 that switches from the frame image non-display to the blue frame image during the expectation degree suggestion effect, and a pattern C2 in which the blue frame image is first displayed and then maintained without switching. Other patterns for the frame image include a pattern in which the frame image is kept hidden.

When it is decided to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect, one of a plurality of types of patterns illustrated in FIGS. 27 (f) to 27 (h) and the like is determined, and the expectation degree suggestion is made based on the determined pattern. The frame image may be displayed / hidden / switched during the production. Further, when it is decided to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect, whether or not to display the frame image at the start of the expectation degree suggestion effect, and if so, either the blue frame image or the red frame image is displayed. After the start, it is decided whether to display the frame image according to the role lottery result of each game or to switch the frame image (random number lottery etc.), so that the decision result for each game can be determined. The frame image may be displayed / hidden / switched. In addition, during the expectation suggestion effect, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (promote) the frame image to have a high expectation in each game, and the frame image is displayed / hidden / switched according to the lottery result. You may do so. In addition, which type of frame image (including non-display) is initially allowed to be displayed during the expectation suggestion effect, and which type of frame image is finally allowed to be displayed during the expectation suggestion effect. It is decided in advance (for example, it is decided at the start of the expectation suggestion effect), and after the expectation suggestion effect is started, a lottery is held as to whether or not to change the game frame image (including display from non-display). When the lottery is won, the image is changed to a frame image that is determined to be displayed first, and thereafter, the frame image that is allowed in advance is within the range (the range that is less than the expected degree of the frame image). ) May be used.

FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a display example in the liquid crystal display 27 when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. In FIG. 28, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described, but when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect and BGM are performed. Is output from the speakers 31L and 31R.

28 (a) to 28 (d) show a display example when the frame image is displayed in the mode of the pattern A1 shown in FIG. 27 (f). When the expectation suggestion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), a message such as "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" is displayed as a title, and a character imitating a frog is displayed in the center. A message such as "Ikke!" Is displayed to liven up the production. As a result, it is possible to encourage the display of the frame image and the switching to the frame image having a high degree of expectation. After the end of the game in which the expectation suggestion effect is started (for example, at the time of the third stop operation of the game, at the time of setting the bet number of the next game, at the time of the start operation in the next game, etc.), FIG. 28 As illustrated in (b), the title display is hidden, and the display of the predetermined effect image including the character and the message is maintained.

FIG. 28B shows a display example when the blue frame image is displayed at the first timing during the expectation degree suggestion effect this time. The blue frame image is displayed superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. Specifically, priority is given so that the layer in which the blue frame image is drawn in the outer peripheral area and the central area is set to be transparent is higher than the layer in which the effect image of the expectation suggestion effect is drawn. By superimposing them on top of each other, the blue frame image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. The first timing in FIG. 28B is the timing during the current expectation suggestion effect, and is a blue frame image in a predetermined timing (for example, the second game, etc.) or a lottery for each game. It may be the timing determined to display.

FIG. 28 (c) shows a display example when the image is switched to the red frame image at the second timing during the expectation degree suggestion effect this time. The red frame image is also displayed superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. Specifically, priority is given so that the layer in which the red frame image is drawn in the outer peripheral area and the central area is set to be transparent is higher than the layer in which the effect image of the expectation suggestion effect is drawn. By superimposing them on top of each other, the red frame image is displayed by superimposing it on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. The second timing in FIG. 28 (c) is a timing after the first timing in FIG. 28 (b) during the current expectation suggestion effect, and is a predetermined timing (for example, 4). It may be the timing when it is decided to display the red frame image in the lottery for each game, etc.).

FIG. 28D shows a display example when the image is switched to the rainbow-colored frame image at the third timing during the expectation degree suggestion effect this time. The rainbow-colored frame image is also displayed superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. Specifically, the layer set so that the rainbow-colored frame image is drawn in the outer peripheral area and the central area is transparent is higher than the layer on which the effect image of the expectation suggestion effect is drawn. By prioritizing and superimposing, the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed by superimposing it on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. The third timing in FIG. 28 (d) is a timing after the second timing in FIG. 28 (c) during the current expectation suggestion effect, and is a predetermined timing (for example, 6). It may be the timing when it is decided to display the rainbow-colored frame image in the lottery for each game, etc.).

28 (e) to 28 (h) show a display example when the frame image is displayed in the mode of the pattern A2 shown in FIG. 27 (f). When the expectation degree suggestion effect is started, the image shown in FIG. 28 (e) is displayed as in FIG. 28 (a). FIG. 28 (f) shows a display example when the red frame image is displayed at the first timing during the expectation degree suggestion effect this time. As described above, the red frame image is displayed superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. The first timing in FIG. 28 (f) is the timing during the expectation suggestion effect, and the red frame image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the second game, etc.) or in the lottery for each game. Then, the timing may be determined. FIG. 28 (g) shows that the display of the red frame image is maintained even at the second timing during the current expectation degree suggestion effect. The second timing in FIG. 28 (g) is a timing after the first timing in FIG. 28 (f) during the current expectation degree suggestion effect.

FIG. 28 (h) shows a display example when the image is switched to the rainbow-colored frame image at the third timing during the expectation degree suggestion effect this time. The rainbow-colored frame image is also displayed superimposed on the effect image of the expectation degree suggestion effect. The third timing in FIG. 28 (h) is a timing after the second timing in FIG. 28 (g) during the current expectation suggestion effect, and is a predetermined timing (for example, 6). It may be the timing when it is decided to display the rainbow-colored frame image in the lottery for each game, etc.).

In addition, although FIG. 28 shows a display example of a part of the patterns A, similarly, the other patterns are shown in FIGS. 27 (f) to 27 (h) according to the progress of the game. The frame image of the frame image is displayed / hidden / switched in the manner shown. In this way, when the expectation degree suggestion effect is started, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the frame image having a high expectation degree is displayed or switched. Further, in FIG. 28, when the frame image is displayed from the state where the frame image is hidden (for example, FIG. 28 (a) → FIG. 28 (b), etc.), the frame image is switched to another frame image. Even in the case of (for example, FIG. 28 (b) → FIG. 28 (c), FIG. 28 (g) → FIG. 28 (h), etc.), the liquid crystal display 27 does not have any effect or effect. As shown, the lighting of various lamps may be controlled in a specific mode, a specific sound effect may be output from the speaker, and the frame image is not displayed in place of or in addition to the sound. When the frame image is displayed from the display state or when the frame image is switched to another frame image, the frame image can be displayed or switched after displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display 27. You may do it. The predetermined effect image may be an image that causes an effect, for example, an effect image accompanied by character or character information, and may be a switching timing, a switching stage, a switching frame image, or the like. Different images may be displayed depending on the situation.

Next, the winning notification effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the winning notification effect is started after the end of the expectation degree suggestion effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and whether or not the privilege is given at the predetermined result notification timing. Notify the result of. In the present embodiment, an example of executing the winning notification effect after executing the expectation suggestion effect according to the progress of the game will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the expectation suggestion effect. (For example, the winning notification effect may be executed after the game is digested a predetermined number of times). Further, the expectation degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect are not limited to those in which the winning degree suggestion effect is executed in connection with the execution of the expectation degree suggestion effect, and even when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, after that. It may occur that the winning notification effect may not be executed, or both effects may be executed independently. If the frame image is displayed in the outer peripheral region when the winning notification effect is started, the frame image is hidden by the time the winning notification effect is started, as shown in FIG. 27 (b). Exit the display.

In the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 27B, none of the frame images is displayed until the result notification timing is reached, and the winning is notified at the result notification timing even when the privilege is won. By displaying only when the image is displayed, the same frame image as the rainbow-colored frame image suggesting that the privilege is given can be displayed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a display example in the liquid crystal display 27 when the winning notification effect is executed. In FIG. 29, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described, but when the winning notification effect is executed, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect and BGM are generated. It is assumed that the sound is output from the speakers 31L and 31R. The winning notification effect in the present embodiment is executed after a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the progress of the game and the expectation degree suggestion effect described above is executed. It should be noted that the winning notification effect may be executed independently of the execution of the expectation degree suggestion effect. For example, even if the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, the winning notification effect may not be executed. It may be something that can occur, and even if the expected degree suggestion effect is not executed even when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the winning notification effect may be executed. It should be noted that one type of winning notification effect may be provided, or a plurality of types of effects having different expectations may be provided. In this case, the expectation level is suggested. An effect corresponding to the degree of expectation suggested in the effect may be executed as a winning notification effect. More specifically, the winning notification effect may be one in which a type of effect according to the final expectation level in the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, depending on the final expectation level of the expectation degree suggestion effect. It may be one in which a production that is not performed (regardless of the final expectation level) is executed. In addition, as the winning notification effect, a winning notification effect with a high expectation, a winning notification effect with a medium expectation, and a winning notification effect with a low expectation are defined, and which of the winning notification effects is executed in advance is determined. In addition, one of the winning notification effects may be executed depending on the game situation until the winning notification effect is executed. Note that FIG. 29 illustrates, for example, how the effect corresponding to the red frame image is executed as the winning notification effect after the red frame image is displayed in the expectation degree suggestion effect.

The winning notification effect in the present embodiment is executed from the next game after the expectation degree suggestion effect is completed to three games. The winning notification effect is started when the bet number of the next game (1Gth) after the expectation degree suggestion effect is completed (note that the start operation may be detected). When the 1G bet number is set, the effect shown in FIG. 29 (a) is started. The effect shown in FIG. 29 (a) is not limited to the one that is started when the bet number setting operation is performed, as long as it is started when the predetermined game operation is performed, for example, the start operation. May be started when is performed. In the winning notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the title of the winning notification effect such as "Compete against Kogaeru-kun!" Is displayed, and the enemy character (Fig. 29) is used as a character imitating a frog. The character arranged on the upper side in (b) may be a character corresponding to the expectation degree suggested as a result in the expectation degree suggestion effect) and the character on the player side (on the lower side in FIG. 29 (a)). It is displayed that the placed character) and the character are located at the start line of the track.

When the 2G start operation is detected, although not shown, after a message such as "OK" or "Start" is displayed, a state in which both characters are competing and jumping to the right is displayed. After that, the competitive display is continued, and when the start operation of the third game is detected, both characters are approaching the goal as shown in FIG. 29 (b), and which character comes first. An effect is executed in which a line image (so-called concentrated line) that improves the degree of attention of these characters is displayed in a state such as whether to reach a goal. The effect of fastening is continuously performed, for example, until the timing at which the third stop operation of the third game is detected (result notification timing in the present embodiment). Therefore, it can be said that the effect to be stopped is the effect immediately before the result notification timing.

When the third stop operation of the third game is detected, the result notification is performed. FIG. 29 (c) is a display example in the case of notifying that the privilege has been won. In FIG. 29 (c), it is shown that the competition effect in the winning notification effect is advanced, and the character on the player side finishes and wins the goal before the enemy character, and the ending of the winning notification effect is shown. It is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the privilege has been won and the privilege will be granted. Further, at the result notification timing for notifying the privilege winning, the rainbow-colored frame image may be superimposed and displayed in the outer peripheral region as shown in FIG. 29 (c). As a result, the same frame image as the rainbow-colored frame image that is a notification of winning confirmation when displayed during the expectation suggestion effect is displayed, so that the privilege winning is recognized not only from the end of the effect but also from the frame image. It can be made easy for the player to understand.

In FIG. 29 (d), it is a part of the result notification in the winning notification effect, and the appearance that the enemy character is sitting backward while the character on the player side is pleased is displayed, and " It is shown that a message such as "You did it!" Is displayed. Further, also in FIG. 29 (d), the rainbow-colored frame image displayed in FIG. 29 (c) is maintained. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the privilege has been won for a longer period of time. In addition, in FIG. 29 (d) and after, the introduction effect of the privilege to be given (for example, AT start effect, etc.) is executed, but the rainbow-colored frame image is hidden when the introduction effect is executed. .. That is, the rainbow-colored frame image in the winning notification effect is executed from FIG. 29 (c) in which the privilege winning is notified to a predetermined timing before the introduction effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the effects such as the winning notification effect executed in the area including the central area of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 are the main effects as described above. It can be said that. Further, since the frame image is executed in the outer peripheral region, it can be said to be a sub-effect. Further, an effect such as a winning notification effect, which is the main effect, may be executed by the effect alone, but a frame image, which is a sub effect, may not be executed by the frame image alone, and the sub effect is the main effect. It is to be executed with.

29 (e) and 29 (f) are display examples in the case of notifying that the privilege has not been won. In FIG. 29 (e), it is shown that the enemy character has reached the goal and lost the bid before the character on the player side by advancing the competitive effect in the winning notification effect, and the end of the winning notification effect. Is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the privilege is not won and the privilege is not granted. FIG. 29 (f) shows a part of the result notification in the winning notification effect, in which the character on the player side is sitting backward while the enemy character is pleased. As shown in FIGS. 29 (e) and 29 (f), any frame image including the rainbow-colored frame image is superimposed and displayed in the outer peripheral region at the result notification timing for notifying the non-winning of the privilege. Never. As a result, the player has an expectation that he / she may have won the prize, as compared with the one that displays the same or the same type of frame image as the frame image that can be displayed during the expectation suggestion effect. Can be prevented. In addition, although the frame image has described an example that can be executed in the expectation degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect, the frame image is not limited to this, and among various effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game, the expectation degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect. It is also executed during other productions that are different from.

(An example of the effect of the expectation suggestion effect and the winning notification effect)
In the above-described embodiment, during the expectation suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (e), the privilege is given by displaying the frame image in the outer peripheral region. Expectations are suggested. Therefore, even if the content of the expectation suggestion effect is designed without considering the content of the frame image, it is difficult to cause a sense of discomfort in the relationship between the frame image and the image of the expectation suggestion effect, and as a result, the expectation suggestion effect is produced. It is possible to make the design easy without narrowing the degree of freedom of the above, and it is possible to prevent the frame image from deteriorating the visibility of the image of the expectation suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, the frame image in the outer peripheral region is hidden by the time the winning notification effect different from the expectation suggestion effect is started. For this reason, the frame image in the outer peripheral region displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect is continuously executed until after the winning notification effect, which is another effect, is started, and the suggestion target becomes difficult to understand. Can be prevented. Further, even during the winning notification effect, a rainbow-colored frame image, which is a frame image suggesting that the privilege of the plurality of frame images is given at the result notification timing, which is a specific timing, may be displayed. , Expectation suggestion Displayed using the same outer peripheral area as during the production. For this reason, it is easier for the player to understand the suggestion that the privilege is given during the winning notification effect, as compared with the case where the effect image that is completely different from the expectation suggestion effect is performed in a completely different area. It is possible to prevent the frame image from deteriorating the visibility of the image of the winning notification effect.

Further, conventionally, there is known a meter / gauge display in which a predetermined gauge is increased according to an operation and the expected degree is suggested by the gauge increase amount. When such a meter / gauge display is performed, there is a possibility that the content of the effect performed in the background is limited to those that are content-related to increasing the gauge. In other words, in order to adopt the meter gauge display, it is necessary that the effect performed in the background is an effect that suits the meter gauge. For this reason, when the degree of expectation is suggested by the meter / gauge display or the like, the degree of freedom of the production performed in the background is narrowed. On the other hand, since the frame image in the present embodiment is displayed in the outer peripheral region, the effect content to be performed in the background is not limitedly narrowed, and can match any effect content. More specifically, the frame images (types 1 to 3 effect images) are effect images of different modes, and are not related to the content / type of the expectation suggestion effect (specific effect) (specific effect). The content and type of are not taken into consideration). For example, as the expectation degree suggestion effect, is it in the first type of expectation degree suggestion effect (for example, the effect illustrated in FIG. 28), or is it in the second type of expectation degree suggestion effect different from the first type? , For example, a red frame image may be displayed or a blue frame image may be displayed without considering which part (timing) of the expectation suggestion effect is being produced. That is, it is not necessary to make the type executed as the expectation degree suggestion effect and the content executed correspond to each of the frame images (type 1 to type 3 effect images). For this reason, the frame image is more versatile than the meter gauge, etc., and it is possible to prevent the degree of freedom of the production performed behind the scenes from being narrowed. Even if it is designed, it is unlikely to cause a sense of discomfort in the relationship between the frame image and the image of the expectation suggestion effect, and as a result, it can be made easy to design without narrowing the degree of freedom of the expectation suggestion effect, and further, the frame. It is possible to prevent the image from degrading the visibility of the image of the expectation suggestion effect.

Furthermore, when adopting the meter / gauge display, the image data and design of the outer frame of the meter and the image data and design of the contents (gauge) of the meter are required respectively, and further, the update process for gradually increasing the gauge is also required. It becomes. On the other hand, in the case of a frame image, it is not necessary to design the image data and the design in such detail. In addition, when the meter gauge display is adopted, the display area of the image of the expectation suggestion effect is limitedly narrowed in order to display the image of the expectation suggestion effect in an area other than the area used for the meter gauge display. However, in the case of a frame image, since it is displayed by superimposing it on the outer peripheral region (furthermore, it has transparency or has a gap portion, etc.), the display region of the image of the expectation suggestion effect is displayed. Does not narrow down in a limited way.

Further, during the winning notification effect, the red frame image and the blue frame image suggesting the degree of expectation are not displayed among the frame images. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate from the expectation degree suggestion production and provide fun, and at the same time, a plurality of frame images are displayed during the winning notification production, making it difficult to understand the content of the winning notification effect regarding the granting of benefits. It can be prevented from being stored. In addition, for example, when a red frame image is displayed during the expectation suggestion effect, the expectation is lowered if a blue frame image having a lower expectation than the red frame image is displayed during the subsequent winning notification effect. There is a risk that the player will be suspicious that it may be, and it may be aroused, but it is possible to prevent such a decrease in expectations.

In addition, unlike the above-described embodiment, a red frame image, a blue frame image, or the like may be displayed during the winning notification effect. For example, the frame image (including the red frame image, the blue frame image, etc.) may be generated only in the game or timing in which the chance-up effect for increasing the expectation is executed in the winning notification effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to understand the occurrence of chance up and to give a sharp impression to the production. In this case, the type of the frame image to be executed may be a specific frame image (red frame image or blue frame image) regardless of the type of chance up, and the red frame image or the red frame image may be executed depending on the type of chance up. A blue frame image may be generated, and a red frame image corresponds to a strong chance up (high expectation chance up), and a blue frame image corresponds to a weak chance up (low expectation chance up). You may try to do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 and the like, during the expectation degree suggestion effect, for example, in the case of the pattern A1, the blue frame image can be displayed at the first timing, and the second timing after the first timing. The red frame image can be displayed at the timing of, and the rainbow-colored frame image can be displayed at the third timing after the second timing. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (f) and the like, the red frame image may be displayed after the display of the blue frame image or may be displayed without the display of the blue frame image. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored frame image is not displayed without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image, but is displayed after at least one of the displays. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the hips are sloppy because the expectation is lowered according to the progress of the expectation suggestion effect. Further, when the rainbow color frame image is displayed, at least either the red frame image or the blue frame image is displayed before that, so that the expectation can be gradually increased and the red frame image can be displayed. And when any of the blue frame images is displayed, the player can have a feeling of expectation that the rainbow color frame image will be displayed.

Further, the rainbow color used in the rainbow color frame image includes the red color used in the red frame image and the blue color used in the blue frame image. Therefore, with respect to the rainbow-colored frame image, it is possible to intuitively notify the player that the privilege is given with high expectation. Further, regardless of the type of the frame image displayed in the outer peripheral region, the outer peripheral region is defined as a common frame-shaped region as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (e). As a result, the suggestion information can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner as compared with the case where the displayed area changes depending on the type of the frame image, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the liquid crystal display 27 can display an image in which a plurality of layers on which an image can be drawn are superimposed, and the layer on which the frame image is drawn is, for example, an expectation degree suggestion effect or a winning notification effect other than the frame image. It is a layer higher than the layer on which the effect image is drawn (a layer that is displayed with priority), and the central area is set to be transparent. As a result, when displaying the frame image, it is not necessary to prepare individual production data for each type of frame image and for each display timing as the production data for executing the expectation suggestion effect. It is not necessary to secure an enormous amount of storage capacity for storing the production data. In addition, the frame image can be displayed at a higher level for the expectation degree suggestion effect, and the player can be surely recognized the expectation degree and the like.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the frame image is preferentially displayed by drawing the frame image on a layer higher than the layer on which the effect image other than the frame image is drawn has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The frame image may be displayed as an object image, for example, superimposed on a specific effect or a special effect (for example, drawn on the same layer or a higher layer), or the frame image may be displayed as a sprite image for a specific effect or a special effect. It may be superimposed and displayed (for example, drawn on the same layer or a higher layer). Further, in the layer for drawing the frame image, an example in which the frame image is drawn in the outer peripheral area and the central area is set to be transparent has been described. However, as described above, the frame image is used as an object image or a sprite image for specific effects or special effects. When superimposing on the effect, an image corresponding to the specific effect or the special effect is drawn in the area including the central area.

Further, in the winning notification effect, the red frame image and the blue frame image are not displayed, and the frame image is not produced only by the frame image in any type, but is performed by the slot machine 1. It is possible to display a plurality of types of effects obtained by using at least the central area of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 when the effect of displaying the effect image is executed in the central area. For this reason, the frame image is not displayed independently, and is executed together with one of the effects of displaying the image in the central area, so that the frame image is displayed only in the outer peripheral area and the effect content is difficult to understand. It can be prevented from becoming. In addition, the frame image is not executed (displayed) as an effect by itself while the game is in progress, but it is specified for testing from the sub control unit, the liquid crystal control unit, etc. for testing the liquid crystal display 27 and various boards. The frame image alone may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a result of receiving the command of.

In addition, various lamps and LEDs (part or all) can emit light in multiple types of colors, and while the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed in the outer peripheral region, they emit light in rainbow-colored, while the red frame. When an image or a blue frame image is displayed, the light is emitted in the same manner as when the frame image is not displayed. As a result, when the red frame image or blue frame image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed, the cooperation with various lamps / LEDs is not performed, while the rainbow color frame image suggesting that the privilege is given is displayed. At that time, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of unity by controlling the various lamps / LEDs to emit light in rainbow colors in cooperation with the display color included in the rainbow color frame image. Therefore, the existence value and premier feeling of the rainbow-colored frame image can be enhanced.

Further, in the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 27A and the like, the rainbow-colored frame image can be displayed at the result notification timing for notifying the result of whether or not the privilege is given. In this way, by displaying the rainbow-colored frame image at an appropriate timing according to the progress of the winning notification effect, when the result is notified in the winning notification effect, it can be visually excited and effectively fanned. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(About a modified example of the expectation suggestion effect and the winning notification effect)
In the above-described embodiment, the rainbow-colored frame image is exemplified as the effect image (type 1 effect image) suggesting that the privilege is given, and the frame image is used in both the expectation degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect. We have described possible examples. However, a plurality of types of effect images suggesting that the privilege is given in the outer peripheral region may be provided. For example, a rainbow-colored frame image and a gold-colored frame image based on gold are provided. It may be the one that has been. In this case, the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed when it is suggested that the privilege is given in the expectation degree suggestion effect, whereas the gold color is displayed when it is suggested that the privilege is given in the winning notification effect. As the frame image is displayed, the type of the first type of effect image to be displayed may be different depending on whether the expectation degree suggestion effect is being produced or the winning notification effect is being produced. That is, the rainbow-colored frame image and the golden-colored frame image may be included as the first type of effect image. As a result, while suggesting that the privilege is given, the frame image that can be displayed during the expectation suggestion effect is not displayed during the winning notification effect, and conversely, the frame that can be displayed during the winning notification effect. Since the image is not displayed during the expectation suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. It should be noted that the first type of effect image may include not only a rainbow-colored frame image and a golden-colored frame image but also an image of another color or mode, and it is possible to specify that a privilege is given. If it is an embodiment, it shall be included in the first type of effect image. In addition, the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed when it is suggested that the privilege is given in the expectation degree suggestion effect, whereas the golden frame is displayed when it is suggested that the privilege is given in the winning notification effect. When the image is displayed, various lamps / LEDs may be made to emit rainbow colors when the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed, and various lamps / LEDs may be made to emit gold when the golden frame image is displayed. , Both lamps and LEDs may be made to emit light in rainbow colors. In this way, it was explained that the first type of production image includes a rainbow-colored frame image and a golden frame image, but the second-type production image and the third-type production image also have a plurality of types of frames. An image may be included, so that the second type of effect image includes a red frame image and a frame image of a specific color, and the third type of effect image includes a blue frame image and a frame image of a predetermined color. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the rainbow-colored frame image has been described as an example in which the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed after passing through either the red frame image or the blue frame image. Is displayed more frequently than it is displayed without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image, as long as it is displayed after at least one of the red frame image and the blue frame image is displayed. good. That is, as in the above-described embodiment, the rainbow color frame image is not displayed without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image (frequency 0%), and the red frame image and the blue frame image are always displayed. The image is not limited to the one displayed after at least one of the displays (frequency 100%). For example, when the rainbow color frame image is displayed during the expectation suggestion effect, the red frame image and the blue frame image are displayed. The rainbow-colored frame image is displayed after either the red-framed image or the blue-framed image is displayed, rather than the rate at which the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed without any of the displays (frequency is, for example, 10%). The type of the frame image may be determined so that the ratio (frequency is, for example, 90%) is higher. That is, the rainbow-colored frame image may be displayed at a relatively low frequency without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image. As a result, it is possible to give the player a premier feeling that the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the rainbow-colored frame image is displayed without displaying either the red frame image or the blue frame image, a special effect (special BGM, special background, special effect, so that the winning confirmation can be grasped can be grasped. (Cut-in, etc.) may be performed. The frequency is not limited to 1% or more, and may include 0% as described above.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 and the like, an example in which the frame image is drawn on a layer higher than the specific effect or the special effect and displayed with priority over the specific effect or the like has been described. Not limited to this, when displaying a specific image related to the progress of the game in the area overlapping with the outer peripheral area, the specific image may be drawn on a layer higher than the frame image and displayed preferentially. good. FIG. 30A shows a display example when the specific image is displayed with priority over the frame image. In FIG. 30A, even after displaying "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" as the title, the message such as "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" is continuously displayed in the area (upper area) where the message such as "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" can be superimposed on the outer peripheral area. There is. As shown in FIG. 30A, the message image such as "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" is displayed with priority over the frame image. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame image from obstructing the visibility of the message image such as "~ mental concentration ZONE ~" which is a specific image, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specific image. In addition, even during the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 29, a specific image (for example, a message image such as "Win the Kogaeru in the competition!") Is displayed, and when the frame image is displayed, the specific image is displayed. It may be displayed with priority over the frame image. Further, the display color of the specific image includes a color corresponding to the type of the frame image displayed in the outer peripheral region (for example, the color used for the frame image), and changes according to the type of the frame image. May be good. The specific image is not limited to a message image as long as it is an image related to the progress of the game, but may be a character image, a cut-in image, or the like. The specific image drawn on a layer higher than the frame image and displayed preferentially may include an error notification image displayed when an error occurs.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a rainbow-colored frame image can be displayed at the result notification timing has been described in an effect (such as a winning notification effect) that is started after the expectation degree suggestion effect is completed. However, not limited to this, in the production started after the expectation suggestion effect is completed (the effect started in connection with the expectation suggestion effect), the frame image is not displayed at all (for example, it is notified that the privilege is given. Even if a specific timing such as timing is reached, none of the frame images including the rainbow-colored frame image will be displayed), and the effect different from the effect started after the end of the expectation suggestion effect (expectation suggestion effect). In the production that is started without being related to), the rainbow-colored frame image may be displayed when a specific timing such as the timing for notifying that the privilege is given during the production is reached. ..

In the above-described embodiment, if the frame image is displayed in the outer peripheral region when the winning notification effect is started, the frame image is hidden and the frame image display is terminated by the time the winning notification effect is started. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 27B, an example of ending the frame image display with the frame image hidden when the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished is shown. However, with respect to the frame image display displayed at the end of the expectation degree suggestion effect, there may be a case where the frame image display is continuously shifted to the winning notification effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the area surrounding the four sides is exemplified as the outer peripheral area for displaying the frame image. However, as the outer peripheral region, an region surrounding the center from the central region to the peripheral edge (arbitrary three sides, two sides facing each other across the center, two or more sides such as an L-shaped side or two sides at the time of inverted L). It should be. Further, the example in which the outer peripheral area for displaying the frame image is the same area during the expectation degree suggestion effect and the hit notification effect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expectation degree suggestion effect and the win notification effect are being performed. It may be defined that the area for displaying the frame image is different in. Such an example will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c). FIG. 30B is a modification of the outer peripheral region during the expectation suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the outer peripheral region during the expectation suggestion effect is defined as the region along the left, lower, and right outer circumferences (three sides) of the four sides. good. Further, FIG. 30C is a modification of the outer peripheral region during the hit notification effect. As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the outer peripheral area during the hit notification effect is defined as an area along the left and right outer circumferences (two sides, opposite sides, and sides sandwiching the center) of the four sides. It may be the one that exists. That is, the "outer peripheral area surrounding the center of the display area" is not limited to the area surrounding all four sides when the display area is rectangular, but includes an area surrounding two or more of the four sides, and the display area is circular. In the case of such cases, the area surrounding the center in two or more places is included.

The expected degree suggestion effect and the winning notification effect shown in the above-described embodiment have been described as the effect executed in the slot machine 1, but the effect is limited to the effect executed in the gaming machine capable of playing the game. Instead, for example, a pachinko gaming machine that launches a pachinko ball into the game area and wins a prize at the start winning opening provided in the game area to variably display a plurality of types of symbols and then stop the pachinko game machine to display the symbol combination. It may be a production performed in.

In the above-described embodiment, AT winning, the number of AT games, stock, etc. are exemplified as benefits, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, so-called bonus winning, RT winning that improves the replay probability, chance zone winning, pachinko game. In the machine, it may be a so-called jackpot, probability fluctuation jackpot, or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the frame image (type 1 to type 3 effect image) is not related to the content / type of the expectation suggestion effect (specific effect) (the content / type of the specific effect is taken into consideration). I explained an example that is not). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame image (type 1 to type 3 effect image) may be related to the content / type of the expectation degree suggestion effect (specific effect), for example. When performing an effect in which characters gather as an expectation suggestion effect (specific effect), the first to third types of effect images are displayed so as to correspond to the number of people gathered and the character. It may be.

The same applies to the winning notification effect (special effect). That is, in the above-described embodiment, the frame image (type 1 effect image) is not related to the content / type of the winning notification effect (special effect) (the content / type of the special effect is not considered). Therefore, regardless of which of the winning notification effects is being executed, the first type of effect image is executed at the timing of the winning notification (result notification). From this, the first type of effect image and the winning notification are executed. It can be said that the production (special production) is not related (not considered) in content. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame image (for example, the first type of effect image) may be related to the content and type of the winning notification effect (special effect), for example, the first type. Even if the winning notification effect (special effect) corresponds to the first type effect image of a specific type, and the second winning notification effect (special effect) corresponds to the first type effect image of the special type. good.

<Regarding the size relationship of the payout rate>
In the above-described embodiment, an example of the winning combination group has been described with reference to FIG. 9 and the like, and an example of the state transition has been described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, but the payout rate (hereinafter referred to as the payout rate) has been described. , Or also referred to as the rate of output) is omitted. The following shows an example in which the winning probability of the winning combination group, the state transition, and the like are changed for the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, and the total payout rate including all the roles including the replay which is the replaying combination. A slot machine 1'that can converge the payout rate to an appropriate range by paying attention to the magnitude relationship between the payout rate and the real payout rate including roles other than replay will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine 1', as a situation that can be controlled according to the progress of the game, the first situation (RT2 described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate and the first situation are described later. By providing a second situation (RT1 described later) in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate, which is the exact opposite of the situation in 1, the payout rate is converged to an appropriate range. An example of what can be done will be described. It is assumed that the slot machine 1'also has the technical matters described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 30.

Here, the payout rate is a rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped by the total number of medals set as the number of bets. .. The total payout rate including all the roles is, for example, when a replay prize is won in a game at the time of three bets, three medals are paid out by the replay prize, and three medals are bet in the next game. It means the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as a medal. On the other hand, the real payout rate including roles other than replay is, for example, when a replay prize is won in a game at the time of betting three cards, 0 medals are paid out by the replay prize, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. The payout rate (second payout rate) calculated as if a bet was made.

FIG. 31A is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1'. In the slot machine 1', RT0, which is a basic game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is consumed, or a state in which a setting change is triggered), and a predetermined transition role in RT0. The gaming state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1 that is transferred by winning A and RT2 that is transferred by winning a predetermined transition combination B in RT0. In each of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting three bets. After being transferred to RT1 or RT2, the game will be transferred to RT0 again by digesting the game defined as the specified number of games 100 times. In RT0 in the slot machine 1', in addition to the above-mentioned transition combination A and transition combination B, a combination lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win a bonus combination, a replay combination, a small combination, etc., and the payout rate is less than 1. It is stipulated to be. Further, in the slot machine 1', regardless of whether it is RT 0 to RT 2, it is assumed that the payout rate is changed to 1 or more when the bonus combination is won. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 31 (a). Is omitted from. The slot machine 1'may change the gaming state between the states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 31B is a diagram for explaining a part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery in RT1 and the high and low of the winning probability. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, etc., 3 cards with 3 cards paid out, and small roles including push order roles that can be paid out 15 cards, etc. will be subject to the role lottery. It has been decided. The three-card combination always wins in the winning game regardless of the pushing order and the operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the push order combination wins a prize when operated in a predetermined push order (corresponding to the above-mentioned advantageous operation mode), and pays out 15 cards, but does not win a prize when the push order is not operated (others). (For example, it may be one that can win a prize).

The winning probability of the bonus combination is set to be 1/250 when the set value is "1" to "3", and is set to 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". It has been decided. Therefore, the winning probability of the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages, that is, when the set values are "1" to "3" and when the set values are "4" to "6". Further, the winning probability of the replay b among the replaying roles is set to be a low probability (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the set value, while the winning probability of the pushing order role among the small winning combinations is , It is set to have a high probability (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Even if the push order combination is won in RT1, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode is not executed (that is, it is not controlled by the AT). Therefore, even if the winning combination is won, for example, there is a 1/6 chance of winning and a 5/6 chance of not winning.

On the other hand, with respect to the winning probability of replay a among the replaying roles and the winning probability of the three-card winning combination among the small winning combinations, the total winning probability is uniform (for example, 50/200, etc.). , The ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the three-card combination is set to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "1" and "6", the replay a has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.), while the three-card combination has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.). It is stipulated to be. When the set values are "2" and "5", both the replay a and the three-card combination are set to have a medium probability (for example, 25/200, etc.). When the set values are "3" and "4", the replay a has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.), while the three-card combination has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.). ing.

FIG. 31 (c) is a diagram for explaining a part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery in RT2 and the high and low of the winning probability. In RT2, as in RT1, a bonus role, a replay role including replay a and replay b, etc., a small role including a 3-card role with 3 payouts and a push order role with 15 payouts, etc. are subject to the role lottery. It is stipulated to be. The winning probability of the replay b in RT2 is set to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other roles is the same as in RT1. It is stipulated to be. Further, when the push order combination is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode is executed. Therefore, when the push order combination is won in RT2, 15 medals will be paid out by winning the push order combination as long as the operation mode is not mistaken. It should be noted that the winning combination subject to the winning combination lottery in RT2 is not limited to the one defined in the same manner as in RT1, but may be defined differently.

Further, in RT1 and RT2, the total winning probability of the replay a and the three-card combination (which is also the total winning probability because a prize is always won at the time of winning) is uniform regardless of the set value. However, when the total payout rate and the real payout rate are focused on and compared, they differ for each set value. For example, when the set values are "1" and "6", the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small because the winning / winning probability of the replay a is low, whereas the set value " When it is 2 ”and“ 5 ”, the difference becomes relatively large, and when it is the set value“ 3 ”and“ 4 ”, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate becomes the maximum. In addition, in any of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6 that affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, the set value and the total payout rate in which the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small It is set to include a set value in which the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value in which the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the maximum.

An example of such a payout rate of RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. The number of medals used to set the number of bets is three, and FIG. 32 illustrates a case where the bonus combination is not won in RT1 and RT2. Since the winning probability of the replay when either the set value "1" or "6" is set during RT1 is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), it is an average between 100G. You can expect to win 10 times. Therefore, in FIG. 32 (a), the “total number of INs” when the replay wins 10 times during 100 G when either the set value “1” or “6” is set during RT1. An example of "real IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" is shown, and the real payout rate and the total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. The "total IN number" and "real IN number" are both the number of medals used for setting the bet number, but the "total IN number" is the number including the bet number automatically set after the replay winning. On the other hand, the "real IN number" is different in that it is the number excluding the number of bets automatically set after the replay winning (the number of bets after the replay winning is "0"). Further, the "total OUT number" and the "real OUT number" are both the number of medals paid out in connection with the small winning combination, but the "total OUT number" is paid out at the time of the replay winning. The "real IN number" is different in that it is the number of sheets that are assumed to be paid out at the time of winning the replay.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the replay wins 10 times in RT1 over 100G, the "total IN number" is "300" (= 100G x 3), and the "real IN number" is "270" (. = 300 sheets-10 times x 3 sheets). Further, the "total number of OUTs" is assumed to be "150", and the "substantial number of OUTs" in this case is "120" (= 150-10 times x 3). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≈120 ÷ 270), while the total payout rate is 0.5 (= 150 ÷ 300).

Next, FIG. 32 (b) will be described. Since the winning probability of the replay when either the set value "3" or "4" is set during RT1 is 20/100 (= (35 + 5) / 200), it is an average between 100G. You can expect to win 20 times. Therefore, in FIG. 32 (b), the “total number of INs” when the replay wins 20 times during 100 G when either the set value “3” or “4” is set during RT1. An example of "real IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" is shown, and the real payout rate and the total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the replay wins 20 times in RT1 over 100G, the "total IN number" is "300" (= 100G x 3), and the "real IN number" is "240" ( = 300 sheets-20 times x 3 sheets). Further, the "total number of OUTs" is assumed to be "150" as in FIG. 32 (a) because the total probability of the replay a and the three-card combination is uniform as shown in FIG. 31 (b). In this case, the "substantial OUT number" is "90" (= 150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (= 90 ÷ 240), while the total payout rate is 0.5 (= 150 ÷ 300).

As described above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the set value, but as shown in FIG. 32 (e), regardless of the set value (at any set value). It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate. It should be noted that the 100G interval when either the set value "2" or "5" is set during RT1 is not shown. However, the "total number of INs" and "total number of OUTs" are the same as those in FIG. 32 (a) and the like because the number of games digested and the total probability of the replay a and the three-card combination are uniform. Further, the number of replay winnings and the "real IN number" and "real OUT number" can be stochastically a numerical value between the numerical values shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b). From this, the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate even during 100 G during RT1 when either the set value "2" or "5" is set. Further, during RT1, the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be in a state.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the set value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value). The situation is higher. This will be described below.

Since the winning probability of the replay when either the set value "1" or "6" is set during RT2 is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), it is an average between 100G. You can expect to win 30 times. In FIG. 32 (c), the “total number of INs” and “substantial IN” when the replay wins 30 times during 100G when either the set value “1” or “6” is set during RT2. An example of "number of sheets", "total number of OUTs", and "real number of OUTs" is shown, and the real payout rate and the total payout rate based on these number of sheets are shown. As shown in FIG. 32 (c), when the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100G, the "total IN number" is "300" (= 100G x 3), and the "real IN number" is "210" (. = 300 sheets-30 times x 3 sheets). Further, the "total number of OUTs" is assumed to be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "substantial number of OUTs" in this case is "510" (= 600-30 times x 3). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.428 (≈510 ÷ 210), while the total payout rate is 2 (= 600 ÷ 300).

Next, FIG. 32 (d) will be described. Since the winning probability of the replay when either the set value "3" or "4" is set during RT2 is 40/100 (= (35 + 45) / 200), it is an average between 100G. You can expect to win 40 times. In FIG. 32 (d), the “total number of INs” and “substantial IN” when the replay wins 40 times during 100G when either the set value “3” or “4” is set during RT2. An example of "number of sheets", "total number of OUTs", and "real number of OUTs" is shown, and the real payout rate and the total payout rate based on these number of sheets are shown. As shown in FIG. 32 (d), when the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100G, the "total IN number" is "300" (= 100G x 3), and the "real IN number" is "180" (18). = 300 sheets-40 times x 3 sheets). Further, the "total number of OUTs" is assumed to be "600" as in FIG. 32 (c) because the total probability of the replay a and the three-card combination is uniform as shown in FIG. 31 (c). In this case, the "substantial OUT number" is "480" (= 600-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.666 (≈480 ÷ 180), while the total payout rate is 2 (= 600 ÷ 300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the set value as described above, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), regardless of the set value (in any case). It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate (even with the set value of). It should be noted that the 100G interval when either the set value "2" or "5" is set during RT2 is not shown. However, the "total number of INs" and "total number of OUTs" are the same as those in FIG. 32 (c) and the like because the number of games digested and the total probability of the replay a and the three-card combination are uniform. Further, the number of replay winnings and the "real IN number" and "real OUT number" can be stochastically a numerical value between the numerical values shown in FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d). From this, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even during 100 G during RT2 when either the set value "2" or "5" is set. Further, during RT2, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. Can be in a state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1', as a situation that can be controlled, the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate including all the roles including the replay and the real payout rate including the roles other than the replay is focused on, and FIG. 31 As shown in (a) and FIG. 32 (e), by providing a situation in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, for example. The payout rate can be converged to an appropriate range as compared with a gaming machine in which only one of the situations where the payout rate is high can occur.

It should be noted that the trigger for the transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined combination such as the transition combination A, that a specific combination of outlier symbols is stopped, the game is digested a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined lottery is won. It may be established by such things. In addition, the opportunity to shift from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined combination such as transition combination B, that a specific combination of outlier symbols is stopped, the game is digested a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined lottery is won. It may be established by such things. In addition, the opportunity to shift from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the one that is established by digesting the game a predetermined number of times, but also winning a predetermined combination, stopping a specific combination of outlier symbols, and winning in a predetermined lottery. It may be established by doing something like that. In addition, the opportunity to shift from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to the one that is established by digesting the game a predetermined number of times, but also winning a predetermined combination, stopping a specific combination of outlier symbols, and winning in a predetermined lottery. It may be established by doing something like that.

Further, the transitional combination A is simultaneously won in the combination lottery with other combination a, combination b, etc., and the transitional combination A is awarded a prize according to the type of the other combination that is simultaneously won by the transitional combination A (for example). The push order) may be different. Further, the transition combination B is simultaneously elected in the combination lottery with other combinations a, combination b, etc., and the transition combination B is awarded a prize according to the type of the other combination that the transition combination B is simultaneously elected (for example). The push order) may be different. Further, the transitional combination A, the transitional combination B, and the other roles a, the combination b, etc. are simultaneously won in the combination lottery, and the transitional combination A is awarded according to the type of the other winning combination. , And the operation mode for winning the transition combination B may be different. In this case, when the transition combination A or the transition combination B is won in RT0, the push order hitting game is generated, so that the interest of the game in RT0 can be improved.

For example, the transition combination A is an RT1 transition replay, and is simultaneously won in the combination lottery with the other normal replay a and the normal replay b, and the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won in the RT1 transition replay according to the type of the other normal replay. The operation mode (for example, the push order) for winning the prize may be different. Specifically, as the winning status in RT0, the winning status a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a and the winning status b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b are provided. While the reel control for winning the RT1 transition replay is performed by the left first stop at the time of a, the reel control for winning the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. In the winning situation b, the reel control for winning the RT1 transition replay is performed by the first stop other than the left, while the reel control for winning the normal replay b is performed by the first stop on the left. You may do it.

Further, the transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, and the other normal replay a and the normal replay b are simultaneously won in the role lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won in the RT2 transition replay according to the type of the other normal replay. The operation mode (for example, the push order) for winning the prize may be different. Specifically, as the winning status in RT0, the winning status c in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a and the winning status d in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b are provided. While the reel control for winning the RT2 transition replay is performed by the left first stop at the time of c, the reel control for winning the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. In the winning situation d, the reel control for winning the RT2 transition replay is performed by the first stop other than the left, while the reel control for winning the normal replay b is performed by the first stop on the left. You may do it.

In RT0 in this case, by notifying that it is a push order hitting game when any of the winning situations a to d (for example, in the winning situations a and b, "pinch! Pushing order avoidance!"" A message is displayed, and when the winning status is c or d, a message such as "Chance! Let me answer correctly by myself!" Is displayed, etc.), and it is possible to provide the player with the fun of thinking about which push order to perform the stop operation. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

Further, in FIG. 31 (a), the game state transition between RT0 and RT2 is illustrated, but the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate including all the roles including the replay and the real payout rate including the roles other than the replay. Focusing on this, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), if there can be a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate. It is not limited to.

Further, in FIGS. 31 (b) and 31 (c), when the total payout rate and the real payout rate are compared with each other, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is different for each set value. In addition, in any of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6 that affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, the set value and the total payout rate in which the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small. It was explained that the set value that the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large and the set value that the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the maximum are included. However, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), there is a winning probability that a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur. If the lottery is performed (for example, the winning probability of the replay is not set to 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. 31 (a) or the game state transition shown in FIG. 31 (b). And, it is not limited to the winning combination and the winning probability, which are the targets of the winning combination lottery shown in FIG. 31 (c) and the like.

<Modification example>
It should be considered that the above embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims. The changes to the embodiment are illustrated below.

(Regarding roles and game state transitions that are subject to the role lottery)
The winning combination and the game state transition in the slot machine described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 32 are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 9, 13, 31, and the like. The winning combination, the game state transition, and the like that are the targets of the winning combination lottery may be, for example, those shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, and even in such a slot machine (game machine), FIGS. 1 to 32. It may have the technical matters described with reference to.

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of each symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R of the slot machine 1 "in the modified example. Each of the reels 11L to 11R has a plurality of types as shown in FIG. 33 (a). The symbols of the above are arranged in a predetermined order. A plurality of types of symbols are composed of symbols. In the following, the names of the plurality of types of symbols are shown to correspond to each other in FIG. 33 (b). ("R7" "B7" "BAR" "BL" "R1" "R2" "BE" "CH" "WM1" "WM2") will be described. The plurality of types of symbols are not limited to the symbols as long as they can be distinguished from other symbols, and may be any pattern, symbols, numbers, or the like. "R7" and "B7" are mainly composed of "7" and have the same shape, but the position and direction of the sharp part (R7: pointed to the left in the upper right part + upward in the lower left part). It is sharp, B7: not sharp in the upper right part and the lower left part, and the hue (R7: red, B7: blue) is different. In addition, "R1" and "R2" are described as "Play" in the center of the pattern, and although they have the same shape and color, they are protruding points (R1: up / down / left / right, R2: upper left, lower left, upper right, right). Below) is different. As described above, since "R1" and "R2" are composed of patterns having similar appearances, they are also collectively referred to as "R". Similarly, "WM1" and "WM2" have a design mainly of "watermelon" and have the same shape and color, but with or without a special design (design that makes you imagine glitter) (WM1: None, WM2: At the cut end. Dotted along) are different. As described above, since "WM1" and "WM2" are composed of patterns having similar appearances, they are collectively referred to as "WM".

In FIG. 33, symbol numbers 0 to 19 are shown at the left end thereof, corresponding to the symbol arrangement area in which the symbols are arranged on each of the reels 11L to 11R. The symbol numbers 0 to 19 are numbers for specifying which symbol arrangement region is the symbol in each of the reels 11L to 11R of the present embodiment.

FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the types of combinations and combination names set in the slot machine 1 ”in the modified example. The winning line NL in the slot machine described below is a left variable display column 10L. It is assumed that a line composed of the middle row, the middle row of the middle variable display column 10M, and the middle row of the right variable display row 10R is set. A replay role and a small role are provided.

As a bonus role, the role name "RBB1" is provided. As the symbol combination of "RBB1", a combination of three "R7" is defined. When a prize is won in "RBB1", it is controlled to a bonus state. The bonus state ends with a game in which the number of medals paid out exceeds the number of medals corresponding to the winning bonus combination (200 medals shown in the remarks column of FIG. 34).

As the re-game combination, the combination names "RP1" to "RP10" are provided. As the symbol combination of "RP1", a combination of three "R1" is defined. For each of "RP2" to "RP10", the symbol combination as shown in FIG. 34 is defined. When the symbol combination of "RP1" and "RP2" stops at the winning line NL, the "R" symbol stops at the middle, middle, and middle stages of each of the reels 11L to 11R, and the "R" symbol appears to be the winning line. Align on NL. When the symbol combination of "RP3" stops at the winning line NL, the "R" symbols stop at the lower, middle, and upper rows of the reels 11L to 11R, and the "R" symbols appear to be aligned on the upward-sloping line. .. “RP4” and “RP5” are also referred to as promotion replays because they serve as an opportunity to control a gaming state (RT2 described later) which is advantageous for a player who has a high probability of winning a replaying combination. When each symbol combination of "RP4" and "RP5" stops at the winning line NL, the "R" symbol stops at the middle and middle stages of each of the reel 11L and reel 11M, and the "BE" symbol stops at the middle stage of the reel 11R. However, apparently, the "R" symbol is tempered on the reels 11L and 11M.

When each symbol combination of "RP6" and "RP7" stops at the winning line NL, the "BAR" symbol stops at the middle of the reel 11M and the upper or lower of the reel 11R, and the "BE" symbol appears at the middle of the reel 11L. When stopped, the "BAR" symbol may appear to be tempered on the reels 11M and 11R. Therefore, "RP6" and "RP7" are also referred to as BAR tempi replay or fake BAR.

On the other hand, when the symbol combination of "RP8" stops at the winning line NL, the "BAR" symbol stops at the lower, middle and upper stages of each of the reels 11L to 11R, and the "BAR" symbol looks up to the right. It may be stopped on the line. For this reason, "RP8" is also referred to as a BAR-aligned replay that rises to the right. Further, when the symbol combination of "RP9" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper, middle, and lower stages of the reels 11L to 11R, respectively, and the "BAR" symbol is apparently on the downward-sloping line. It may be in a stopped state. For this reason, "RP9" is also referred to as a downward-sloping BAR-aligned replay. When the symbol combination of "RP10" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "CH" symbol may be stopped at the middle and upper stages of the reels 11L and the reels 11M, respectively.

As the small role, the role names "PZ1" to "PZ41" are provided. For each of "PZ1" to "PZ41", the symbol combination as shown in FIG. 34 is defined. Of these, when the symbol combinations of "PZ1" and "PZ2" stop at the winning line NL, the "BE" symbol stops at the upper, middle, and lower stages of the reels 11L to 11R, respectively, and the appearance is "BE". The symbol is stopped at the downward-sloping line. Therefore, "PZ1" and "PZ2" are also referred to as right-down bells. When the symbol combination of "PZ3" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "BE" symbol is stopped at the middle, middle, and middle stages of the reels 11L to 11R, respectively, and the "BE" symbol is stopped on the winning line NL. Therefore, "PZ3" is also referred to as a middle bell. "PZ1" to "PZ3" will be awarded when the push order is correct in the state other than the bonus state, and will be won regardless of the push order in the bonus state, and 9 medals will be paid out. "PZ4" to "PZ36" can be won according to the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R even when the pressing order is incorrect (failure), and four medals are paid out. "PZ4" to "PZ36" are also referred to as push order incorrect answer bells.

Further, when the symbol combination of "PZ37" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "WM" symbol is stopped at the upper, middle, and lower stages of the reels 11L to 11R, respectively, and the "WM" symbol is stopped at the lower right line. There is. Therefore, "PZ37" is also called a watermelon. When each symbol combination of "PZ38" to "PZ40" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "CH" symbol may be stopped at the upper or lower stage of each of the reels 11L and 11M. Therefore, "PZ38" to "PZ40" are also referred to as cherries. "PZ41" is a role that can stop the chance that the "WM" symbol is tempted on the winning line NL. "PZ37" to "PZ41" can be won according to the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and four medals are paid out.

In the internal lottery process shown in S03 of FIG. 5, a combination lottery is performed for each of a plurality of types of winning combination groups composed of predetermined combinations among the combinations shown in FIG. 34. The winning combination group and combination composition will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

As a winning combination group including a bonus combination, an "RBB" composed of the bonus combination "RBB1" is provided. The winning combination group including the bonus combination may include not only the bonus combination but also the winning combination group that is elected at the same time as other combinations (for example, "PZ38" to "PZ41").

The winning role groups for the replay role are "normal replay", "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "RT2 transition replay"), "fake play", and "fake play". "BAR matching replay" is provided. "Normal replay" is a winning combination group composed of "RP1" and "RP2". "RT2 Transition Replay 1" is a winning combination group composed of "RP1", "RP2", "RP4", and "RP5". The winning combination group of the other replaying combination is also composed of the combination described in the combination composition column of FIG.

As the winning role group of the small role, "cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4", and "all small roles" are provided. Of these, "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are a plurality of types of roles of "PZ4" to "PZ36" in addition to "PZ1" and "PZ2" or "PZ3". It is a winning combination group configured to include combinations that are different from each other. "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" are also collectively referred to as "push order bell". "All small roles" is a winning combination group consisting of all small roles. The winning combination groups of other small combinations are also composed of the combinations described in the combination composition column of FIG.

Of these multiple types of winning combination groups, the winning combination group to be the target of the combination lottery is determined for each of the plurality of types of gaming states. Further, the determination value related to the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is determined according to the winning combination group, the controlled gaming state, and the set value.

As the game states that can be controlled in the slot machine 1 "," RT0 "to" RT2 "," RBB1 "are won, so-called carry-over game state and internal winning state" RT3 ", and a bonus role. "RBB1" which is a bonus state accompanying a prize is provided. "RT0" to "RT2" are also collectively referred to as a general gaming state.

Among the winning combination groups including the bonus combination, "RBB" is subject to the combination lottery in the general gaming state. For the winning combination group including the bonus combination, the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/400 when the set value is 1, for example. As the determination value of the winning combination group including the bonus combination, different determination values are set according to the set value, and the winning probability increases as the set value increases. For example, when the set value is 6, the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/380. In addition, "RBB" may have a determination value set so as to win with a uniform probability regardless of the set value. Further, the probability of winning a winning combination group including a bonus combination is not limited to the example, and may be set to be another probability.

Next, among the winning combination groups including the re-gaming combination, the "normal replay" is subject to the combination lottery in the general gaming state, "RT3". Further, "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" are subject to the combination lottery only in "RT1". "Fake play" and "BAR matching replay" are subject to the role lottery in "RT1" and "RT2", respectively. The winning probability of the winning combination group including the replaying combination is the winning probability according to the type of controlled RT.

The probability of winning any of "normal replay", "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3", "fake play", and "BAR matching replay" is, for example, "RT1" ≤ "RT0" <"RT3". "<The determination value is stored so that the relationship is" RT2 ". Therefore, it can be said that "RT2" in the general gaming state is an advantageous state for the player because the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is improved as compared with other gaming states. Further, the determination value is stored so that the probability of winning any one of "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" is, for example, 1/20 in "RT1". Further, the probability of winning the "fake play" and the probability of winning the "BAR matching replay" are, for example, 1/20 in "RT1" and 1/10 in "RT2", respectively. Is remembered. The probability of winning a winning combination group including a replaying combination is not limited to the example, and may be set to be another probability.

Of the winning role groups including small roles, "cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are subject to the role lottery in the general game state and "RT3", respectively. Become. In addition, the probability of winning each of "cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is determined so that it is a uniform probability regardless of the game state and the set value. It is remembered. For example, the probability of winning any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is, for example, 1/5 regardless of the playing state or the set value, and "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4". 4 ”The determination values are evenly distributed so that the winning probabilities of each are the same. The determination value is stored so that the probability of winning any of "cherry", "watermelon", and "chance eye" is, for example, 1/100 regardless of the game state or the set value. In addition, "all small roles" are subject to the combination lottery in "RBB1", and the judgment value is set so that they will be won with a probability of 1/1. Win a prize in "PZ3" with payout. Therefore, it can be said that the "RBB1" is in an advantageous state for the player as compared with the general gaming state and the like. It should be noted that the probability of winning a winning combination group including a small combination is not limited to the example, but may be set to be another probability, and is determined according to the set value. It may be the one that exists.

In the internal lottery process, the judgment value (judgment value according to the set setting value) of the winning combination group that is the target of the combination lottery in the current game state is read and subtracted from the extraction value (the extraction value is updated). Performs a determination process to determine whether or not is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 0), and if it is not a smaller value (for example, when it is 0 or more), performs a determination process for the next winning combination group. Repeat the cycle.

When it is determined in the determination process for any of the winning combination groups that the value is smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that the winning combination group has been won, and the winning flag of the combination included in the winning combination group is determined. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 65, and the winning combination lottery is completed. Therefore, the probability of winning the winning combination group is "determined value of the winning combination group / 65536". It can be said that the winning combination group has a high winning probability because the larger the determination value read out in the winning combination lottery, the easier it is for the value to be smaller than the predetermined value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not smaller than the predetermined value even though the judgment process is performed for all the winning combination groups that are the targets of the winning combination lottery, no winning combination group has been won. Is determined to be. The probability of "missing" in the present embodiment may be set so that, for example, "RT1" ≥ "RT0"> "RT3"> "RT2".

The internal lottery process ends the winning combination lottery when it is determined that one of the winning combination groups has been won, or when it is determined that no winning combination group has been won and it is "missing". In the internal lottery process, a process for outputting a winning type command capable of specifying the type of the winning combination group won in the winning combination lottery to the sub control board 73 is performed. For example, when "RBB1" is won, a winning type command that can identify that a bonus combination has been won is output, and when any of the winning combination groups including the replaying combination is won, it becomes one of the replaying roles. A winning type command that can identify that you have won is output, and when you win any of "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4", you can specify that you have won the push order bell. Output the type command. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group.

As shown in FIG. 33, the symbols constituting the "RBB1" have parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels. For example, only one symbol "R7" constituting "RBB1" is arranged on the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, even if the "RBB1" is won, it may not be possible to draw the symbols constituting the bonus combination into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and there is a possibility that the "RBB1" will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35, when the "RBB1" is won, the reel control for drawing in the winning bonus combination within the drawable range may be performed, but none of the winning combinations may be won. Regarding "RBB1", if the winning game cannot be won, the process of carrying over the winning flag of the bonus combination is performed until the winning combination is won under the control of RT3.

As shown in FIG. 33, the "R1" constituting the middle symbol and the right symbol of "RP1" and "RP2" included in the "normal replay" are arranged within the retractable range in all the reels 11L to 11R. There is. On the other hand, "R1" and "R2" constituting the left symbols of "RP1" and "RP2" have places that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels, respectively. However, when the "normal replay" is won, either "RP1" or "RP2" is won. As a result, when the "normal replay" is won, either "RP1" or "RP2" can be won without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

Further, the symbols constituting the replay combination included in each of "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" have some parts in the reel symbol arrangement that do not exist within the retractable range, but "RT2 transition replay" When each of "1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" is won, all the corresponding replays are won. As a result, when any of "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" is won, the replay included in the winning "RT2 transition replay" is performed regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R. You can always win one of the roles.

Further, at the time of winning "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3", it is determined that the target to be pulled in is different depending on the type of the first stopped reel. The first stop means that the reels are stopped first when all the reels 11L to 11R are rotating. Further, the first stopped reel is also referred to as a first stopped reel. Further, the second stop means to stop when one reel is stopped by the first stop and the remaining two reels are rotating, and the third stop means that the remaining one reel is rotating. Sometimes it means to stop. The operation of the stop switch for the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop is also referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

For example, when the "RT2 transition replay 1" is won and the left first stop (the left reel 11L is the first stop), "RP4" and "RP5" accompanied by the transition to RT2 are used as other roles. It is stipulated to draw in with priority over. The "R1" and "BE" constituting the middle and right symbols of "RP4" and "RP5" are all arranged within the retractable range on the reels 11M and 11R. On the other hand, "R1" and "R2" constituting the left symbols of "RP4" and "RP5" have some parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11L, but one of the symbols is the winning line. They are arranged within a range that can be pulled in on the NL. In addition, when "RT2 Transition Replay 1" is won, either "RP4" or "RP5" is won. As a result, when "RP4" and "RP5" are drawn in in preference to other roles, either "RP4" or "RP5" can be awarded. Therefore, when the "RT2 transition replay 1" is won and the left first stop is made, the reel control is performed so that one of "RP4" and "RP5" is always won.

On the other hand, when the "RT2 transition replay 1" is won and the middle or right first stop (the middle or right reel 11M or 11R is the first stop), "RP1" is more than "RP4" and "RP5". "And" RP2 "are stipulated to be drawn in with priority. Therefore, when the "RT2 transition replay 1" is won, the reel control is performed so that one of "RP1" and "RP2" is always won when the middle or right first stop is made.

In addition, when the "RT2 transition replay 2" is won, the reel control is performed so that when the middle first stop is made, one of "RP4" and "RP5" is always won, and the left or right first. When stopped, reel control is performed so that either "RP1" or "RP2" will always win a prize. In addition, when the "RT2 transition replay 3" is won, the reel control is performed so that when the right first stop is made, one of "RP4" and "RP5" is always won, and the left or middle first. When stopped, reel control is performed so that either "RP1" or "RP2" will always win a prize.

The push order in which either "RP4" or "RP5" is won when any of "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" is won is also referred to as a correct answer procedure. When any of "RT2 transition replay 1" to "RT2 transition replay 3" is won during the above-mentioned AT, information that can specify the correct answer procedure is notified as an advantageous operation mode.

Next, the reel control when the "fake play" is won will be described. The symbols that make up the replay role included in the "fake play" have some parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement, but when the "fake play" is won, all the corresponding replay roles are included. Win. As a result, when the "fake play" is won, any of the replay roles included in the "fake play" can be won without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

Further, when the "fake play" is won, it is stipulated that the target to be drawn in is different depending on the type of the first stopped reel. For example, at the time of winning the "fake play", when the left first stop or the middle first stop is made, the reel control is performed so that one of "RP1" and "RP2" is always won.

On the other hand, when the "fake play" is won, when the first stop is made on the right, "RP6" and "RP7" are given priority over "RP1" and "RP2". The "R1" and "BE" constituting the right symbols of "RP6" and "RP7" are arranged within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11R. Further, the "BEs" constituting the left symbols of the "RP6" and the "RP7" are arranged within the retractable range on the reel 11L. On the other hand, the "BAR" constituting the middle symbol of "RP6" and "RP7" has a part that does not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11M. For this reason, when the "Fake Play" is won, when the first stop on the right is made, "RP6" and "RP7" are pulled in with priority over other roles, and the stop switch 21M draws the middle symbol "BAR" to the winning line NL. When the stop operation is performed at a timing that allows the switch to be pulled upward, either "RP6" or "RP7" can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 21L.

When the stop switch 21M is not stopped at the timing when the middle symbol "BAR" can be pulled onto the winning line NL, a prize is generated according to the already stopped symbol among "RP1" to "RP3". It is stipulated that the role should be prioritized and drawn in. For example, when "R1" is stopped as the right symbol, either "RP1" or "RP2" can be preferentially drawn in to win a prize. Further, when "BE" is stopped as the right symbol, it is stipulated that "RP3" is preferentially pulled in. "BE" constituting the left symbol of "RP3" is arranged within the retractable range on the reel 11L, and "R1" constituting the middle symbol of "RP3" is arranged within the retractable range on the reel 11M. Has been done. Therefore, when "RP3" is preferentially drawn in, "RP3" can always be won.

When the first stop on the right is made when the "fake play" is won, either "R1" or "BE" can be stopped on the winning line NL as described above. At this time, when both the "R1" of the symbol number 0 and the "BE" of the symbol number 1 of FIG. 33 are stopped at the timing when they can be drawn onto the winning line NL, the "R1" of the symbol number 0 is used. Is also stipulated to give priority to the "BE" of the symbol number 1 and draw it onto the winning line NL. Further, when both the "R1" of the symbol number 5 and the "BE" of the symbol number 6 of FIG. 33 are stopped at the timing when they can be drawn onto the winning line NL, the "BE" of the symbol number 6 is higher than the "BE" of the symbol number 6. It is stipulated that the "R1" of the symbol number 5 is given priority and drawn onto the winning line NL. For this reason, when the first stop on the right is made when the "fake play" is won, the "BE" of the symbol number 1 is placed on the winning line NL when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbol of the symbol numbers 2 to 4. It is possible to stop and stop the "BAR" symbol in the lower row, or stop the "R1" of symbol number 5 on the winning line NL and stop the "BAR" symbol in the upper row.

In addition, when the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper or lower row by the first right stop at the time of winning the "fake play", when the middle second stop is performed, the stop operation is aimed at the "BAR" symbol of the symbol number 3. At that time, the "BAR" of the symbol number 3 can be stopped on the winning line NL. In this way, when the "Fake Play" is won, the "BAR" symbol can be moved to either the upward-sloping line or the downward-sloping line by stopping the "BAR" symbol by the first right stop and the second middle stop. You can make it tempai. When the left symbol "BE" constituting "RP6" and "RP7" is stopped on the winning line NL, at least the "BAR" symbol of symbol number 2 is in the upper row from the symbol arrangement of the reel 11L shown in FIG. 33. Alternatively, since it is not stopped in the lower row, the "BAR" symbols are not stopped in line on the line.

Next, the reel control when the "BAR matching replay" is won will be described. The symbols that make up the replay combination included in the "BAR alignment replay" have some parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement, but when the "BAR alignment replay" is won, the corresponding replay combination Win all. As a result, when the "BAR matching replay" is won, any of the replaying roles included in the "BAR matching replay" can be won without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

Further, at the time of winning the "BAR matching replay", it is stipulated that the target to be drawn in is different depending on the type of the first stopped reel. For example, at the time of winning the "BAR matching replay", when the left first stop or the middle first stop is made, the reel control is performed so that one of "RP1" and "RP2" is always won.

On the other hand, when the "BAR Matching Replay" is won, when the first stop on the right is made, it is stipulated that "RP8" and "RP9" are preferentially drawn in over "RP1" and "RP2". The "R1" and "BE" constituting the right symbols of "RP8" and "RP9" are arranged within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11R. On the other hand, "R1" and "CH" constituting the left symbols of "RP8" and "RP9" have places that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11L. Further, the "BAR" constituting the middle symbol of the "RP8" and the "RP9" has a part that does not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11M. For this reason, when the "BAR Matching Replay" is won, when the first stop on the right is made, "RP8" and "RP9" are pulled in with priority over other roles, and the stop switch 21L is the left symbol "R1" and "CH". When any of the above is stopped at the timing when it can be pulled onto the winning line NL, and when the stop switch 21M is stopped at the timing when the middle symbol "BAR" can be pulled into the winning line NL, "RP8" "And either" RP9 "can be awarded.

On the other hand, when neither "RP8" nor "RP9" can be won by the timing of the stop operation to the stop switches 21L and 21M, the following reel control is performed. First, when the stop switch 21M is not stopped at the timing when the middle symbol "BAR" can be pulled into the winning line NL by the second stop operation, or when the stop switch 21L is not operated at the timing when the left symbol "R1" or "CH" can be drawn. When the stop operation is not performed at the timing when it can be pulled into the winning line NL, it is decided to preferentially pull in the winning combination according to the already stopped symbols of "RP1" to "RP3". Has been done. Therefore, for example, when "R1" is stopped as the right symbol, either "RP1" or "RP2" can be preferentially drawn in to win a prize, and "BE" is stopped as the right symbol. Occasionally, "RP3" can be given priority and won a prize.

Next, in a state where the middle symbol "BAR" is pulled onto the winning line NL by the second stop operation and stopped, the stop switch 21L moves the left symbol "R1" or "CH" by the third stop operation to the winning line NL. When the stop operation is not performed at the timing when it can be pulled up, it is stipulated that the winning combination of "RP6" and "RP7" which causes a prize according to the already stopped symbol is preferentially pulled in. Therefore, for example, when "R1" is stopped as the right symbol, "RP6" can be given priority to win a prize, and when "BE" is stopped as the right symbol, "RP7" is given priority. You can pull in and win a prize.

In the state where the left symbol "R1" or "CH" is pulled onto the winning line NL by the second stop operation and stopped, the stop switch 21M pulls the middle symbol "BAR" onto the winning line NL by the third stop operation. When the stop operation is not performed at a possible timing, it is stipulated that the winning combination of "RP1" and "RP10" is preferentially drawn according to the already stopped symbol. Therefore, for example, when "R1" is stopped as the left symbol, "RP1" can be given priority to win a prize, and when "CH" is stopped as the left symbol, "RP10" is given priority. You can draw in and win a prize.

When the first stop on the right is made when the "BAR Matching Replay" is won, either "R1" or "BE" can be stopped on the winning line NL as described above. At this time, when both the "R1" of the symbol number 0 and the "BE" of the symbol number 1 in FIG. 33 are stopped at the timing when they can be drawn onto the winning line NL, it is the same as when the "fake play" is won. Because the reel control is performed, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbols of symbol numbers 2 to 4, the "BE" of symbol number 1 is stopped on the winning line NL and the "BAR" symbol is displayed in the lower row. It is possible to stop or stop the "R1" of the symbol number 5 on the winning line NL and stop the "BAR" symbol in the upper row.

In addition, when the "BAR matching replay" is won, the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper or lower row by the first right stop, and the "BAR" symbols of the reels 11L and 11M are respectively in the second stop and the third stop. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, the "BAR" symbol can be stopped on the winning line NL. Therefore, by aiming at the "BAR" symbol and stopping the operation when the "BAR alignment replay" is won, the "BAR" symbol can be tempered or aligned at either the upward-sloping line or the downward-sloping line. .. As a result, by aligning the "BAR" symbols on the upward-sloping line or the downward-sloping line, it is possible to deterministically notify the player that the "BAR matching replay" has been won. In addition, when the "BAR" symbol is tempted to the upward-sloping line or the downward-sloping line, the player has the expectation that he has won the "BAR-matched replay" when the stop operation timing does not match. You can make it.

As shown in FIG. 33, the left symbols (“BAR”, “BL”, “WM1”) constituting the small combination included in the “cherry” among the small combinations do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11L. Exists. Therefore, even if the "cherry" is won, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 21L, it may not be possible to pull in the left symbol that constitutes the small winning combination included in the "cherry", and there is a possibility that the "cherry" will be missed. ..

Among the small combinations, the symbols constituting the small combinations included in the "watermelon" are arranged within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, when the "watermelon" is won, the small winning combination included in the "watermelon" can be drawn in and won a prize regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

Of the small winning combinations, the left symbol (“WM1”) and the middle symbol (“WM2”) constituting the small winning combination included in the “chance eye” are within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L and 11M as shown in FIG. 33. There are places that do not exist inside. Therefore, even if the "chance eye" is won, depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L and 21M, it may not be possible to pull in the left symbol or the middle symbol that constitutes the small winning combination included in the "chance eye". , May be missed.

Next, the reel stop process (corresponding to S16 in FIG. 15) when any one of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won will be described. When any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won, it is stipulated that the target to be pulled in is different depending on the type of the first stopped reel.

For example, when the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won, when the left first stop is made, it is stipulated that "PZ1" and "PZ2", which are to be paid out 9 cards, are drawn in with priority over other roles. There is. "R1" and "R2" constituting the left symbols of "PZ1" and "PZ2" have places that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reel 11L, but one of the symbols is on the winning line NL. It is arranged within the range that can be pulled into. In addition, when the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won, either "PZ1" or "PZ2" is won. As a result, when "PZ1" and "PZ2" are drawn in in preference to other roles, either "PZ1" or "PZ2" can be awarded. Therefore, when the "left correct answer bell 1" is won and the left first stop is made, the reel control is performed so that one of "PZ1" and "PZ2" is always won.

On the other hand, when the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won, when the middle or right first stop is made, priority is given to other small roles such as "PZ4" which are simultaneously won over "PZ1" and "PZ2". It is stipulated to pull in. As shown in FIG. 33, none of the symbols constituting the other small combinations such as "PZ4" are arranged within the retractable range from the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, it is not possible to draw in the symbols that make up other small wins such as "PZ4" that is simultaneously won in the winning line, and even if the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won. In some cases, it may not be possible to win a prize in any of the roles.

Also, even when "Left Correct Answer Bell 2" to "Left Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "PZ1" and "PZ2" can always be won when the left first stop is made, but when the middle or right first stop is made. There is a place where other small winning combinations that have been won at the same time are preferentially drawn in over "PZ1" and "PZ2", and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R cannot draw in the symbols constituting the other small winning combination. Since it is an existing symbol array, it may not be possible to win any small winning combination depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. Similarly, even when the "Medium Correct Answer Bell 1" to the "Medium Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, the "PZ3", which always pays out 9 cards when the first stop is stopped, can be won. However, when the first stop is made on the left or right, the other small winning combinations that are simultaneously won are drawn in with priority over the "PZ3", and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R is the symbol that constitutes the other winning combination. Since the pattern array has parts that cannot be pulled in, it may not be possible to win any of the winning combinations depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. In addition, even when "Right Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "PZ3", which always pays out 9 cards when the first right stop is made, can be won, but the left or middle first stop is made. Occasionally, other small wins that have been won at the same time are preferentially drawn in over "PZ3", and there are places where the symbol arrangement of reels 11L to 11R cannot draw in the symbols that make up the other small wins. Since it is an array, it may not be possible to win any small winning combination depending on the operation timing of the stop switch.

The push order in which any of "PZ1" to "PZ3", which is paid out when 9 cards are paid out when any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won, is also called a correct answer procedure. When any one of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won during the above-mentioned AT, information that can specify the correct answer procedure is notified as an advantageous operation mode.

When any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won, the timing that cannot be operated by the correct answer procedure and that none of the other small wins that are won at the same time can be won. When the stop operation is performed with, among the "missing" symbol combinations, a specific "missing" symbol combination that does not stop on the winning line when "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are not won. The reel is controlled to pull the winning line onto the winning line. A particular "missing" symbol combination is accompanied by a transition to "RT1" when stopped on the winning line NL at "RT0" or "RT2". For this reason, a particular "off" symbol combination is also commonly referred to as a transition roll.

When the "all small wins" are won (for example, during the "bonus state"), 9 cards are always paid out regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 21L-21R, whichever is "PZ1" to "PZ3". Reel control is performed so as to win a crab.

In addition, in the reel stop processing when the winning of the bonus role is carried over (RT3) and the replaying role or the small role is won, it is stipulated that the replaying role or the small role is drawn in with priority over the bonus role. Has been.

In the reel stop processing, every time any of the reels 11L to 11R stops, a reel stop command that can specify the stopped reel and the stop position (for example, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage) is issued. Output. As a result, the sub-control board 73 can specify the stopped reel and the stop position, and can execute the corresponding effect.

In the process for transitioning the game state, a game state flag that can specify the game state from the next time onward is set based on the combination lottery or the result of the game. The game state flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies the currently controlled gaming state based on the gaming state flag. FIG. 36 shows the transition of the gaming state.

The process for transitioning the gaming state sets a gaming state flag that can identify "RT1" when the normal transition roll is stopped on the winning line NL at "RT0" or "RT2". In addition, the game state setting process sets a game state flag that can identify "RT2" when winning the promotion replays "RP4" to "RP5" in "RT1". The process of setting the game state flag that can specify "RT2" is included in the privilege granting means that controls to grant the privilege corresponding to the combination.

In addition, the process for transitioning the game state is a game state in which "RT3" can be specified when no prize is won in the game in which "RBB1" is won in any of "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2". Set the flag. Further, in the process for transitioning the game state, a game state flag that can specify the "bonus state" is set when the "RBB1" is won. The process of setting the game state flag that can specify the "bonus state" is included in the privilege giving means that controls to give the privilege corresponding to the combination. The process for transitioning the game state counts the number of payouts in the "bonus state" and sets a game state flag capable of specifying "RT0" when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number. Further, the slot machine 1 ”sets a game state flag that can specify“ RT0 ”when it is initialized by changing the setting or the like.

Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 36. In the following, first, the transition of the gaming state when the AT is not controlled during the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as non-AT) will be described.

When the "slot machine 1" is initialized by changing the setting or the like, it is set to RT0 as a game state and the game is started. In RT0, the "push order bell" is won with a relatively high probability (1/5). On the other hand, when the "push order bell" is won, the AT game for notifying the advantageous operation mode (correct answer procedure) is not performed. Therefore, the push order bell is dropped at a relatively early timing, and the normal transition roll is stopped, and the RT1 is controlled.

In RT1, if the "RT2 transition replay" is won and the "promotion replay" wins, it is controlled by RT2. However, since it is not AT, the AT game that notifies the advantageous operation mode (correct answer procedure) at the time of winning the "RT2 transition replay" is not performed. Also, since it is still non-AT after winning the "promotion replay" and being controlled by RT2, as with RT0, as a result of winning the "push order bell" with a relatively high probability, it is usually at a relatively early timing. The transition roll is stopped and controlled by "RT1". Therefore, during non-AT, most of the games are played in RT1.

Further, even if the "RBB1" is won in the middle of RT1, the winning operation cannot be performed unless the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols constituting the "RBB1" can be drawn onto the winning line NL. As a result, if it is not possible to win a prize in the game in which "RBB1" is won, it is controlled by "RT3".

If you win "RBB1", you will be controlled to a bonus state. In the bonus state, as a result of winning all the small wins in each game, any of "PZ1" to "PZ3", which pays out 9 medals regardless of the operation mode, can be won, so medals can be efficiently awarded. Can be acquired. When the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number, the bonus ends and the control is set to "RT0".

On the other hand, when the AT is controlled during the advantageous period, one of "PZ1" to "PZ3", which is paid out of 9 cards when the "push order bell" is won in "RT1" and "RT2", is selected. The advantageous operation mode for winning a prize is notified by the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27. As a result, any one of "PZ1" to "PZ3" can be reliably won as long as the stop operation is not mistaken. As a result, the rate at which nine medals are paid out increases. Further, when the "RT2 transition replay" is won during "RT1" when controlled by the AT, the advantageous operation mode for winning the "promotion replay" is notified by the notification display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27. Will be done. As a result, as long as the stop operation is not mistaken, the "promotion replay" can be surely won. As a result, it can be controlled by "RT2". Furthermore, when controlled by the AT, as described above, it is possible to win a prize such as "PZ1" when the "push order bell" is won, so that it is possible to avoid a normal transition roll, and therefore the player falls from "RT2" to "RT1". It is also possible to prevent it from happening. As a result, most of the games can be played in RT2 during AT.

Further, after the winning RBB is completed during the AT, the number of AT games and the like are carried over, so that the AT is performed again, the advantageous operation mode is notified, and the control is performed by "RT2". The period controlled by "RT0" and "RT1" until it is controlled by "RT2" after the RBB won during AT is finished is the preparatory stage until it is controlled by "RT2". Also called a period. In addition, when the "push order bell" is won in "RT0" which is controlled after the RBB won during AT is finished, "PZ1" etc. are won so that it can be transferred to "RT1". The advantageous operation mode for this is not notified. In the processing related to the advantageous period and AT and the like, the same processing as that described in FIG. 12 is performed.

The slot machine 1 as described above may also be provided with the technical matters shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 (for example, technical matters relating to the expectation degree suggestion effect, the winning notification effect, the frame image, etc.). , 31 and 32 may be provided with the technical matters (technical matters relating to the magnitude relation of the payout rate).

(Technical matters related to payout rate)
With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, as a situation that can be controlled, the total payout rate is focused on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate including all the roles including the replay and the real payout rate including the roles other than the replay. There are situations where the real payout rate is higher than the real payout rate (hereinafter, also referred to as the first situation) and the situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate (hereinafter, also referred to as the second situation). An example of a slot machine that is available. Further, as the first situation, RT2 is exemplified as a gaming state in which the payout rate is 1 or more, and as the second situation, RT1 is exemplified as a gaming state in which the payout rate is less than 1. Further, as the first situation, an AT in which the navigation effect can be executed as a game state in which the payout rate is 1 or more is exemplified, and in the second situation, the navigation effect is not executed as the game state in which the payout rate is less than 1. Non-AT was exemplified. In other words, in a situation where the total number of grants, which is the total number of game values granted, is greater than the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the number of bets, the actual payout is higher than the total payout rate. The rate is higher than the real payout rate when the total number of grants, which is the total number of game values granted, is less than the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the number of bets. Also showed an example where the total payout rate is higher. Further, in the notification state for notifying the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, and in the non-notification state where the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination is not notified, it is substantially. An example is shown in which the total payout rate is higher than the payout rate. Furthermore, it can be said that it has the following configuration. For example, in the first situation, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate because the probability of winning the replaying combination is set higher than in the second situation in the role lottery.

Further, any of the above relationships can be established regardless of the set value actually set among the plurality of set values having different advantages for the player. As shown in FIG. 32, for example, in the first situation, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value actually set, and the second situation is. Regardless of the actually set value, the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate.

Further, FIGS. 31 and 32 show the ratio of transition to RT1 (for example, the winning / winning ratio of the transition combination A) and the ratio of transition to RT2 (for example, the winning / winning ratio of the transition combination B). However, for example, the rate of transition to RT1 is set to be lower as the set value is higher, while the rate of transfer to RT2 is set to be higher as the set value is higher. It may be the one specified in. Specifically, regarding the winning ratios of the transitional roles A and B in the combination lottery during RT0, first, the winning ratio of the transitional combination A is set to be lower as the set value is higher, while the transitional combination The winning ratio of B may be set to be higher as the set value is higher. Further, when the set value is low (for example, in the case of "1" to "3"), the ratio of transition to RT1> the ratio of transition to RT2 is set, while the set value is set. When is high (for example, in the case of "4" to "6"), the relationship may be such that the rate of transfer to RT1 <the rate of transfer to RT2. In other words, for example, the setting value "6" having the most advantageous advantage (hereinafter, also referred to as the first setting value) and the setting value "1" having the most disadvantageous advantage (hereinafter, also referred to as the second setting value). The ratio of the first setting is higher when the first setting value is set than when the second setting value is set. It may be set so that the rate of the second situation is higher when the second set value is set than when the value is set.

Further, FIGS. 31 and 32 show the ratio of transition to non-AT (for example, the winning / winning ratio of the transition combination A) and the ratio of transition to AT (for example, the winning / winning ratio of the transition combination B). However, for example, the higher the set value, the lower the rate of transition to non-AT, while the higher the set value, the higher the rate of transition to AT. It may be specified to be. Specifically, regarding the winning ratios of the transitional roles A and B in the combination lottery during RT0, first, the winning ratio of the transitional combination A is set to be lower as the set value is higher, while the transitional combination The winning ratio of B may be set to be higher as the set value is higher. Further, when the set value is low (for example, in the case of "1" to "3"), the relationship is set so that the ratio of transition to non-AT> the ratio of transition to AT is set. When the value is high (for example, in the case of "4" to "6"), the relationship may be defined so that the ratio of transition to non-AT <the ratio of transition to AT. .. In other words, for example, a setting value "6" (first setting value) having the most advantageous advantage and a setting value "1" (second setting value) having the most disadvantageous advantage are provided. , The rate of the first situation is higher when the first set value is set than when the second set value is set, and it is higher than when the first set value is set. However, it may be set so that the rate of the second situation is higher when the second set value is set.

In addition, in FIGS. 31 and 32, an example in which the player is always transferred to the AT by winning / winning the transition combination B has been described. A transition lottery may be performed, and by winning the AT transition lottery, the game may be transferred to the AT so that the payout rate becomes 1 or more (first situation). In this case, in the combination lottery, the ratio of winning the winning combination that triggers the AT transition lottery is determined to be higher as the set value is higher, and lower as the set value is lower. It may be the one that has the same ratio regardless of the set value. In addition, the ratio of winning in the AT transition lottery (AT transition ratio at the time of winning the winning combination that triggers the AT transition lottery) is set to be higher as the set value is higher, and lower as the set value is lower. It may be set to be the same, or it may be set to have the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Further, in FIGS. 31 and 32, as the first situation, a state in which the payout rate is 1 or more and the replay high probability + the navigation effect is present (RT2 and AT) is exemplified as the game state, and the second situation is as follows. As a gaming state in which the payout rate is less than 1, a state in which the replay low probability + the navigation effect is not performed (RT1 and non-AT) is exemplified. That is, both the first situation and the second situation exemplify the state in which the high and low of the replay probability and the presence or absence of AT are linked. However, there is no difference between the presence and absence of AT in the first situation and the second situation, and there is a difference depending on the level of the replay probability. For example, in the first situation, the payout rate is increased by setting the replay high probability. In the second situation, the payout rate may be less than 1 by setting the probability of replay to be low. Further, in the first situation and the second situation, there is no difference in the replay probability, and there is a difference depending on the presence or absence of AT. For example, in the first situation, the payout rate is 1 or more by assuming that there is AT. In the second situation, the payout rate may be less than 1 by setting no AT. Further, the first situation and the second situation are different depending on whether they are in the bonus state or the normal state (or normal RT, RT0 in FIG. 31, etc.) in place of or in addition to the replay probability and the presence or absence of AT. For example, in the first situation, the payout rate is set to 1 or more by setting the bonus state, and in the second situation, the payout rate is set to less than 1 by setting the normal state. It may be in a state.

(At the start of reel rotation)
An example in which the process of step S15 of FIG. 5 is performed in the main game and the process of step S42 of FIG. 7 is performed in the simulated game at the start of reel rotation in the above embodiment has been described. Specifically, in the process of step S15 of FIG. 5 in the main game, the process for the main game (for example, steps S61 to S69) is performed, whereas in the process of step S42 of FIG. 7 in the simulated game, the pseudo is performed. Processing for the game is performed. Therefore, in the above embodiment, the processing content of step S15 of FIG. 5 in the main game at the start of reel rotation and the processing content of step S42 of FIG. 7 in the simulated game are different, that is, for starting reel rotation. As the processing, an example in which a processing dedicated to the main game and a processing dedicated to the pseudo game are provided has been described. On the other hand, regarding the excitation pattern (control data) for outputting the excitation signal to the reel motor at the start of reel rotation, the process of step S15 in FIG. 5 in this game and step S42 in FIG. 7 in the simulated game. In the process of, the same control data may be used, or different control data may be used.

Further, the process used at the start of reel rotation may be the same process (all common, partial common) between the main game and the pseudo game. Further, the process used at the start of reel rotation is the excitation pattern used at the start of reel rotation even when the same process (all common, partially common) is performed between the main game and the pseudo game. The control data) may be the same data (all common, partially common) between the main game and the pseudo game, or may be different data. In addition, when the same data (all common, partially common) is used between the main game and the pseudo game, the steady rotation speed (predetermined speed) to be reached in the main game and the constant to be reached in the pseudo game. When the speed is different, the control data of the faster speed (for example, the steady rotation speed in the main game) is stored in a ROM or the like, and the faster speed is reached (for example, at the start of the main game). Controls the reel rotation using the control data, whereas when the speed is reached to the slower speed (for example, at the start of a pseudo game), the control data for control until the slow speed is reached. The reel rotation control may be performed using the data.

(About stop enablement)
In the above embodiment, as the process for enabling the main stop in the main game, the process of steps S71 and S72 in FIG. 8 is performed after the wait time progress determination (step S12 in FIG. 5), and the pseudo stop is enabled in the pseudo game. As a process for this purpose, an example of performing the process of step S44 of FIG. 7 in step S11 before the wait time progress determination (step S12 of FIG. 5) has been described. That is, an example in which the processing for enabling the main stop or the pseudo stop is different in timing between the main game and the pseudo game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processes for enabling the main stop or enabling the pseudo stop may be the same in terms of timing. For example, after the wait time progress determination in FIG. 5 (step S12 in FIG. 5), steps S09 to S11 may be performed and step S15 may be performed. As a result, regardless of whether it is a main game or a pseudo game, it is possible to wait for the start of rotation of the reel until the wait time elapses, and to perform a process for enabling the stop after the reel has rotated. In this case, the process for enabling the stop may be the same process (all common, partial common) between the main game and the pseudo game. When the process for enabling stop is the same process and the steady rotation speed (predetermined speed) to be reached in the main game and the constant speed to be reached in the pseudo game are different, a certain speed is reached. As a reference speed for whether or not the game has been played, the speed corresponding to the start of the main game or the start of the pseudo game may be read and set.

(When the reel rotation is stopped)
An example in which the process of step S16 of FIG. 5 is performed in the main game and the process of step S45 of FIG. 7 is performed in the simulated game when the reel rotation is stopped in the above embodiment has been described. In the process of step S16 of FIG. 5, when the stop operation is performed, for example, any of the symbols arranged within a predetermined retractable range from the symbols located on the winning line NL of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is selected. It is a process of drawing into the winning line NL and stopping, and specifically, stop position determination data for determining a stop position according to a winning combination within a drawable range is used. The stop position determination data is stored in the ROM 67 in advance. On the other hand, in the process of step S45 of FIG. 7, an example in which the same process as the reel stop process in step S16 may be performed has been described. That is, the process used when the reel rotation is stopped may be the same process (all common, partial common) in the main game and the pseudo game. In this case, in the process of step S45, the stop position determination data itself used in the process of step S16 may be used. However, in terms of the internal processing of the gaming machine (slot machine), if the data itself is used in the same way as the main game, it becomes impossible to distinguish between the main game and the pseudo game, which causes confusion in inspections, for example. there is a possibility. Therefore, when the stop position determination data stored in the ROM 67 is used in the process of step S45, the data is exactly the same as the stop position determination data used in the process of step S16, but the identification for specifying the data to be used. Information (for example, a data label or the like) may be different from the case used in the process of step S16, or the write destination address may be written in the process of step S16 once written to a predetermined area of the RAM 65 when used. It may be different from the address. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an efficient inspection.

(About the start and end triggers of the pseudo game specific notification)
In the above embodiment, in FIG. 5, an example in which the wait time progress determination is performed in step S12 after performing the processes of steps S09 to S11 relating to the simulated game has been described. Therefore, the pseudo game start command, which is the process in step S41 of FIG. 7, is transmitted when it is determined that the start lever has been operated in step S02 of FIG. 5, and the pseudo game start command, which is the process in step S51 of FIG. 7, is transmitted. An example in which the game end command is transmitted before the wait time progress determination is performed has been described. As a result, at least the pseudo game identification notification on the sub control board 73 side is started when the start lever that triggered the pseudo game is operated. However, the pseudo game specific notification is not limited to this as long as it is started in response to the operation of the start lever, and for example, after the wait time progress determination in FIG. 5 (step S12 in FIG. 5), the step S09 to step S11 may be performed. In this case, the pseudo game start command in step S41 of FIG. 7 is transmitted after the start lever is operated and the wait time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to start the pseudo-game specific notification when the start lever that triggered the pseudo-game is operated and the wait time is determined to have elapsed.

Further, when it is determined in step S10 that the pseudo game is executed when the specific condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S11, and the pseudo game start command is transmitted in step S41 to start the pseudo game specific notification (FIG. 14). Step S106), when the introduction operation is performed after the pseudo game (step S50 in FIG. 7), the pseudo game end command is transmitted in step S51 to end the pseudo game specific notification (step S109 in FIG. 7). ) An example was explained. However, a predetermined command is transmitted (for example, a command transmitted at any of the timings shown in FIG. 25A) at a timing corresponding to the operation to the start lever that triggered the pseudo game. When the start of is identifiable on the sub-control board 73 side, the pseudo game start command may not be transmitted in step S41. Further, a predetermined command is transmitted at a timing corresponding to the end of the pseudo game (for example, a command transmitted at any timing shown in FIG. 25B), and the end of the pseudo game is terminated on the sub-control board 73 side. When it can be specified, the pseudo game end command may not be transmitted in step S51. Even in this case, the pseudo game start command in step S41 and the pseudo game end command in step S51 are transmitted to the test machine side when the game machine is connected to a predetermined test machine and a test is performed. It may be configured to enable this.

(About the operation promotion effect to the start lever (start switch 19))
In the above embodiment, at the timing when the start lever can be operated, for example, in order to raise the expectation of the player, a lever operation promotion effect (for example, a message display such as "hit the lever!"" That encourages the operation of the start lever is displayed. ) May be performed. The lever operation promotion effect may be executed at a higher rate when the degree of advantage to the player is high than when it is low, depending on the results of the combination lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the like. However, the lever operation promotion effect is the pre-game period (determination process of step S02 in FIG. 5) in which the operation to the start lever for starting one game can be accepted immediately after the specified number of bets is set. In the repeating period), it may not be executed or may be executed only at a lower rate than when it is not the pre-game period. In the pre-game period, it is unclear whether the pseudo-game is started by operating the start lever or the main game is started immediately. In such an unknown period, the lever operation promotion effect is executed and the start lever is started. It is possible to prevent the player from paying too much attention to the operation and to give the player an unnecessarily high expectation. On the other hand, during the period in which the introduction operation and the operation for starting the next pseudo game can be accepted (the period in which the determination process of step S50 in FIG. 7 is repeated), the lever operation promotion effect may be executed, for example. , It may be executed at a higher rate than the pre-game period.

(Regarding the notification mode during pseudo stop)
In the above embodiment, the reels that perform the pseudo-game specific notification during the pseudo-game and are pseudo-stopped at regular time intervals as shown in FIG. 22A during the pseudo-game and during the pseudo-stop. An example of slightly vibrating the reel was described. That is, an example has been described in which when the reels are quasi-stopped, they vibrate slightly at regular intervals, and by performing a quasi-game specific notification, the quasi-stop is notified during the quasi-game. However, when the pseudo game specific notification is performed when the reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-stop pattern 2 (FIG. 22 (b)) that does not vibrate slightly is not the pseudo-stop pattern 1 (FIG. 22 (a)) that causes slight vibration. )) May be used. On the contrary, when the pseudo stop is performed by the pseudo stop pattern 1, the pseudo game specific notification may not be performed at least during the period. That is, when the pseudo stop is performed by the pseudo stop pattern 1, the pseudo game specific notification may not be performed only during the pseudo stop period, and the pseudo stop is performed by the pseudo stop pattern 1. The pseudo-game specific notification may not be performed during the period from the start to the end of the pseudo-game. In principle, the pseudo-game specific notification is performed during the pseudo-game, but the pseudo-game specific notification is exceptionally interrupted during the pseudo-stop, and the pseudo-stop ends when the pseudo-game is performed multiple times. Then, when the reel rotation is started, the pseudo game specific notification may be restarted.

Further, as the pseudo game identification notification, an example in which the notification by the game identification lamp 82 and the notification by the liquid crystal display 27 are performed has been described. However, when the pseudo game identification notification is performed, the notification by the game identification lamp 82 has been described. And only one of the notifications by the liquid crystal display 27 may be performed. In addition, during the simulated game, benefits for the player (for example, the size of the number of AT games granted or added, the high continuation rate of whether or not to continue AT, the high set value, etc.) Depending on the degree of advantage, the combination of the type of pseudo stop pattern (pseudo stop pattern 1 or pseudo stop pattern 2 etc.) and the type of pseudo game identification notification (game identification lamp 82 or liquid crystal display 27 etc.) It may be selected. This makes it possible to provide fun such as predicting the degree of advantage of the privilege from the combination of notification modes during the simulated game.

In the above embodiment, an example of notifying that a pseudo game is being performed has been described by each of a slight vibration of a reel that is pseudo-stopped, a game identification lamp 82, and a liquid crystal display 27. However, the fact that the pseudo-game is in progress may be notified by any one of the slight vibration of the reel that is pseudo-stopped, the game-specific lamp 82, and the liquid crystal display 27. Further, even when the pseudo game identification notification is not performed by the game identification lamp 82, the game identification lamp 82 can notify that the player is in AT or CZ, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pseudo game identification notification is not performed by the game identification lamp 82, the game identification lamp 82 may not be provided in the game machine (it is not necessary to provide the game identification lamp 82). For example, when performing pseudo game identification notification on the liquid crystal display 27, the game identification lamp 82 may not be mounted on the game machine.

(Random delay time measurement start timing)
In the random delay wait processing described in step S62 or the like of FIG. 8 in the above embodiment, for example, after determining the delay time for delaying the rotation start timing of the reel to be rotated, the measurement of the delay time is started. , The process of shifting to the next step S63 or the like is performed in order to start the reel rotation when the delay time has elapsed. Here, the timing for starting the measurement of the delay time may be the determined timing as long as the delay time is determined, but for example, among the reels that are pseudo-stopped, the reel that is the target of the delay is selected. It may be the timing when the excitation pattern of the excitation signal for slight vibration becomes a predetermined state. That is, after the delay time is determined, until the excitation pattern of the reel subject to the delay reaches a predetermined state, the delay time measurement start is waited for, and the delay time measurement is started from the timing when the delay time measurement starts. You may do it. If the measurement of the delay time is started without considering that the reel is slightly vibrating due to the pseudo stop, it is considered that the reel is excited by various excitation patterns when the delay time elapses. As a result, depending on the excitation pattern when the delay time elapses, there is a possibility that step-out or the like may occur when the reel is excited by the excitation pattern for starting the reel rotation. However, as described above, the timing at which the measurement of the delay time is started is set to the timing when the excitation pattern of the excitation signal for slightly vibrating the reel to be delayed among the reels that are pseudo-stopped is in a predetermined state. Therefore, the rotation can be smoothly started by the excitation pattern for the rotation start used after the random delay elapses.

Specifically, when the excitation pattern for starting the reel rotation after the lapse of the delay time is defined as, for example, 1 phase → 1 phase + 2 phase → 2 phase → 2 phase + 3 phase → ... When the excitation with the above excitation pattern is started after the delay time elapses at the timing when the phase becomes one phase due to the slight vibration, the reel can be smoothly started to rotate. On the other hand, when the excitation with the above excitation pattern is started after the delay time elapses at the timing of two phases due to the slight vibration at the time of pseudo stop, the reel rotation is performed because the two-phase excitation is changed to the one-phase excitation. Since the reel is once excited in the opposite direction, the reel may not be able to start rotating smoothly, and in some cases, the reel may step out. However, as described above, the timing at which the measurement of the delay time is started is set to the timing when the excitation pattern of the excitation signal for slightly vibrating the reel to be delayed among the reels that are pseudo-stopped is in a predetermined state. Therefore, the rotation can be smoothly started by the excitation pattern for the rotation start used after the random delay elapses.

It should be noted that the predetermined state is, for example, a state (excitation state) designed in advance so that the delay time does not elapse at the timing of 2 phase or 2 phase + 3 phase due to slight vibration at the time of pseudo stop. .. That is, even when the measurement of any delay time that can be set when the excitation pattern is one phase is started, if the excitation pattern is one phase when the delay time elapses, the excitation pattern is set. The state of one phase becomes a predetermined state. Further, even when the measurement of any delay time that can be set when the excitation pattern is, for example, 2 phases + 3 phases is started, if the excitation pattern is 1 phase when the delay time elapses, the excitation is performed. The state in which the pattern is 2 phase + 3 phase is the predetermined state. Further, even when the measurement of any delay time that can be set when the reel is not slightly vibrating is started, if the excitation pattern is one phase when the delay time elapses, the reel is fine. The non-vibrating state is the predetermined state.

(others)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the game identification lamp 82 that performs the pseudo game identification notification is electrically connected to the sub control board 73 and is controlled on the sub control board 73 side has been described. However, the game specifying lamp 82 may be electrically connected to the main control board 63 so as to be controlled on the main control board 63 side. Further, the game identification lamp 82 can only notify that the pseudo game is in progress when the pseudo game specific notification is being performed, and is in this state in other states (AT, CZ, etc.) that are not in the pseudo game. Although the example of notifying is also described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated lamp that only performs pseudo-game specific notification may be used.

In the above embodiment, as shown in steps S61 to S69 of FIG. 8, the delay time is determined for one reel in the order of the left reel 11L, the middle reel 11M, and the right reel 11R, and the reels rotate over the delay time. An example of shifting to random delay processing for the next reel by starting rotation after delaying the start has been described. However, the random delay processing is not limited to this as long as it randomly disperses the positional relationship of each of the reels 11L to 11R. For example, the delay time for each of the reels 11L to 11R when the random delay processing is started. After determining, the measurement of the delay time may be started, and the rotation may be started in order from the reel on which the determined delay time has elapsed.

In the above embodiment, in FIG. 22 and the like, an example of outputting an excitation signal to the reel motor so as to cause the reel that is pseudo-stopped to slightly vibrate at regular time intervals (for example, 500 msec) has been described. However, the excitation signal is not limited to this as long as it outputs an excitation signal before a certain period of time elapses. May be output. Further, a plurality of including a first excitation pattern that outputs an excitation signal every first hour less than a certain period of time and a second excitation pattern that outputs an excitation signal every second hour (> first hour) less than a certain period of time. A kind of excitation pattern is provided, for example, a privilege for the player (for example, the size of the number of AT games given or added, the high continuation rate of whether or not to continue AT, the high set value, etc.). The excitation pattern is determined for each pseudo game so that the higher the degree of advantage is, the higher the ratio of selecting the second excitation pattern than the first excitation pattern is determined, and the pseudo is based on the excitation pattern. The reels that are pseudo-stopped during the game may be controlled. This makes it possible to provide fun such as predicting the degree of advantage of the privilege from the excitation pattern of the reel that is pseudo-stopped.

Further, the mode of slightly vibrating the reel that is pseudo-stopped is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types are defined, that is, a plurality of types of excitation signal patterns for performing operations such as microvibration are defined. It may be the one that exists. For the plurality of types of operations, for example, at least one of a plurality of types of parameters such as the swing width to be moved by vibration, the vibration time, the vibration speed / interval, and the like may be different. Further, the pseudo-stopped reel is operated in the first excitation pattern for operating in the first type mode and the second type mode (larger swing width than the first type, longer vibration time, etc.). A plurality of types of excitation patterns including the second excitation pattern are provided, and for example, a privilege for the player (for example, the size of the number of AT games given or added, and the high continuation rate of whether or not to continue AT). The excitation pattern is determined for each pseudo game so that the higher the degree of advantage is, the higher the rate at which the second excitation pattern is selected than the first excitation pattern. The reels that are pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game may be controlled based on the excitation pattern. This makes it possible to provide fun such as predicting the degree of advantage of the privilege from the excitation pattern of the reel that is pseudo-stopped.

Further, regarding the determination of the number of pseudo games that can be performed by satisfying the specific conditions, for example, the size of the number of AT games to be granted or added to the player when the specific conditions are satisfied. The number of pseudo games so that the higher the degree of advantage according to the degree of advantage of (high continuation rate of whether to continue AT, high set value, etc.), the higher the rate determined for the number of times. May be decided. Further, as another example, when a specific condition is satisfied and a pseudo game is started, the continuation rate for continuing the pseudo game is selected from among a plurality of types of continuation rates (for example, 30%, 60%, 90%, etc.). The number of pseudo-games may be specified by determining and determining whether or not to perform the next pseudo-game after the end of one pseudo-game according to the continuation rate. In this case, depending on the degree of advantage of the privilege for the player (for example, the size of the number of AT games granted or added, the high continuation rate of whether or not to continue AT, the high set value, etc.). The continuation rate may be determined so that the higher the degree of advantage, the higher the rate of determination of the high continuation rate. This makes it possible to provide fun such as predicting the degree of advantage of the privilege from the number of times the pseudo game is executed. Also, regarding specific conditions, the advantages of benefits for players (for example, the size of the number of AT games granted or added, the high continuation rate of whether or not to continue AT, the high set value, etc.) The success or failure of a specific condition may be determined (specified) so that the higher the degree of advantage is, the higher the ratio of establishment.

In the pseudo game in the above embodiment, an example in which all the reels 11L to 11R are rotated and then pseudo-stopped in response to an operation to the stop switch has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all the reels 11L to 11R are all. After rotating the reel 11L and the reel 11R, the reel 11L and the reel 11R are automatically pseudo-stopped according to the passage of time, etc., whereas only the reel 11M may be pseudo-stopped according to the operation of the stop switch 21M. .. Further, in the pseudo game, the symbol combination (for example, BAR alignment) that has been pseudo-stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch is automatically rotated for all reels 11L to 11R according to the passage of time, and then the symbols are again. A combination (for example, BAR alignment) may be automatically pseudo-stopped and then shifted to random delay processing or the like, or a symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination) that is pseudo-stopped in response to an operation on the stop switch. , Not limited to BAR alignment), after automatically rotating all reels 11L to 11R according to the passage of time, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, BAR alignment) is automatically pseudo-stopped. It may be possible to shift to random delay processing or the like later.

Further, during the pseudo game, the reels may not be automatically stopped according to the passage of time, and the pseudo stop may be performed only by operating the stop switch as in the main game. Further, during the simulated game, it is not possible to cancel in the middle of the game, and as in the main game, the game may be terminated only by operating the stop switch. Specifically, in the pseudo-game process of FIG. 7, at least one of the process of steps S48 and S49 and the process of step S47 may not be performed. For example, when it is determined to be NO in step 46, it may be shifted to step S45, and when it is determined to be NO in step 46, it may be shifted to step S47 or it is determined to be NO in step S48. When it is done, it may be shifted to step S45. This makes it possible to improve the degree of intervention of the player in the simulated game.

In the pseudo game reel activation process in step S42 of FIG. 7 in the above embodiment, an example in which all the reels 11L to 11R are rotated at the same time is described as in the case of a normal game which is not a pseudo game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel rotation may be started in a predetermined order (see, for example, FIG. 23 (a')).

In the above embodiment, an example in which an operation to the start lever is required in order to shift to the next process (main game or the next pseudo game) in the pseudo game has been described. However, as an operation for shifting to the next process (for example, a random delay process or the next pseudo game) in the pseudo game, a bet number setting operation may be performed instead of or in addition to the operation to the start lever. Further, the next process (for example, random delay process or the next pseudo process) is performed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after all the reels are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game without requiring the operation of the start lever. It may be made to automatically shift to the game).

In the above embodiment, even if it is not determined in step S34 of FIG. 6 that the AT combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S35, and in step S35, "0" is pressed as a value and stored in the order buffer. You may do it. In this case, the determination process of step S13 in FIG. 5 may not be performed, and if the value is "0" in step S14, the notification display 60 may be hidden.

In the above embodiment, the content of the navigation effect and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game has been described as an example of determining in step S121 of FIG. 12 on the sub control board 73 side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The content of the navigation effect or the like to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 may be determined on the main control board 63 side during the simulated game, and the determined content may be transmitted to the sub control unit 73 to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. .. For example, the main control board 63 determines the content of the navigation effect or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game according to the result of the winning combination lottery, or randomly determines by the random number lottery or the like. May be good. Further, when the main control board 63 determines the position and the symbol to be pseudo-stopped on the main control board 63 side, the position and the symbol to pseudo-stop the contents such as the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the pseudo game. It may be decided according to the above, or it may be decided according to the predetermined contents according to the position and the symbol to be pseudo-stopped.

In the above embodiment, in the normal game in which the pseudo game does not occur during AT, the mode of the stop operation is displayed on the notification display 60, and the value specified from the push order command from the main on the liquid crystal display 27. An example of displaying the mode of the stop operation based on (value stored in the push order buffer) has been described. However, in the simulated game during AT, any navigation effect or the like can be executed on the liquid crystal display 27 regardless of the value specified from the push order command, while the liquid crystal display 60 on the notification display 60. The mode of the stop operation is not displayed regardless of the navigation effect of the device 27, but the winning combination information (winning flag) of the winning combination before the start of the simulated game is retained, and is used for notification after the simulated game is completed. The display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27 may each notify the mode of the stop operation based on the winning combination information.

In step S14 of FIG. 5 in the above embodiment, the mode of the stop operation of notifying based on the value stored in the push order buffer before the occurrence of the pseudo game is provided regardless of whether or not the pseudo game has occurred. An example of specifying is described, but the value stored in the push order buffer before the occurrence of the pseudo game is not used. For example, the value (see FIG. 6B) is specified at the timing after the end of the pseudo game. The mode of the stop operation based on the value may be notified on the notification display 60.

In the above embodiment, the area irradiated by the game identification lamp 82 and used for the pseudo game identification notification (for example, the area surrounding the character of "pseudo game" shown in FIG. 17B or the like) is a single color edge. It is covered. Further, the area used for the pseudo-game identification notification by the game identification lamp 82 (for example, the area of the area surrounding the character of "pseudo-game" shown in FIG. 17B or the like) is, for example, notification of bonus winning or the like. It may be defined to be larger than the area used for the notification of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 and the area used for the notification of the advantageous period notification lamp 80. Further, the area used for the pseudo game identification notification by the game identification lamp 82 is determined to have a size different from that of the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R (for example, the BAR symbol), and the size of the symbol is 80. It may be defined as a size of% or a size of 150% of the symbol. Further, the area used for the pseudo game identification notification by the game identification lamp 82 is determined to have a size different from that of the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R (for example, the BAR symbol), and the size of the symbol is 80. It may be defined as a size of% or a size of 150% of the symbol. Further, although the example in which the pseudo-game mode used for the pseudo-game specific notification is a mode of lighting in red has been described, a mode of lighting in a color not used in any of the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R has been described. It may be an embodiment in which the color used in the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R and the color located on the opposite side of the color wheel are used for lighting.

In the above embodiment, a specified number of bets are set for the various LEDs electrically connected to the main control board 63, and reel rotation (not only reel rotation of this game but also specific conditions can be obtained by operating the start lever. It includes an LED (start operation activation notification means) for lever activation notification to notify that it is established and that it is in a state where it is possible to start (including the reel rotation of the pseudo game performed before the main game). May be good. The LED for lever activation notification is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the left side of the display window 7 of the front door 5 and at a position visible to the player. The LED for lever activation notification is, for example, turned on when a predetermined number of bets are set in step S01 of FIG. 5 and is determined to be YES, and the lever activation is notified, and the start lever is notified in step S02. Is operated and a YES is determined, the light is turned off to the effect that the lever is not enabled. On the other hand, when it is determined as YES in step S46 of FIG. 7 because all the symbols are pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game, and the operation to the start lever (introduction operation) is enabled. Even so, the LED for lever activation notification is not controlled to be lit again. As a result, the lever activation is not notified even during the period when the introduction operation can be accepted. As a result, in the state where the lever operation for the already set bet number has been detected, the pseudo game is realized by notifying that the lever is activated again even though the new bet number is not set. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding as if it was a game.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (d), the display is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game of the "N game" according to the determination result of step S121 in FIG. The mode of the stop operation notified by the navigation effect (pushing order 321) and the mode of the stop operation notified by the notification display 60 in the main game after the end of the pseudo game are displayed. Although "6" has described an example in which the push order 321) may show the same contents as that of FIG. 6 (b), FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 show depending on the determination result of step S121 of FIG. As shown in (d), the mode of the stop operation (pushing order 321) notified by the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game of "N game" and the book after the simulated game is completed. In the game, there may be a case where the mode of the stop operation notified by the notification display 60 (“6” is displayed, “6” indicates the push order 321 from FIG. 6 (b)) is different from the content. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the combination of the notification content during the simulated game and the notification content during the main game.

On the other hand, in step S121 of FIG. 15, for example, as a mode of the stop operation notified by the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the mode of the stop operation notified by the notification display 60 in this game. ("6" is displayed, "6" may be determined to have the same content as the push order 321 from FIG. 6 (b)), and conversely, the display for notification in this game. It may be determined that the mode of the stop operation notified by the device 60 (“6” is displayed, “6” is always different from the push order 321 from FIG. 6 (b)). ..

In the above embodiment, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c), the mode of the stop operation is displayed (displayed on the main control board 63 side) on the notification display 60 in this game. Corresponds to the mode (color, shape, design, size, etc.) of the navigation effect (displayed on the sub-control board 73 side) displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 and the display on the notification display 60. An example has been described in which the mode of the navigation effect and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 (displayed on the sub control board 73 side) during the simulated game (when not displayed on the main control board 63 side) is the same. That is, when the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the main game and the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game are notified of the same content (pushing order, etc.), the same mode (color and) is used. , Shape, design, size, etc.). However, the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the main game and the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the simulated game are modes even when the same content (pushing order, etc.) is notified. (Color, shape, design, size, etc.) may be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the simulated game is the main game from the aspect of the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display unit 13 includes three left variable display columns 10L to right variable display columns 10R will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even a gaming machine provided with one variable display column may be used. It may be a gaming machine having four or more variable display columns. Further, although the variable display unit 13 is configured by the reels 11L to 11R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display unit 13 may be configured by a display device such as a liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED. Further, the example in which only one winning line is set for the variable display unit 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of winning lines may be set.

1 slot machine, 11L, 11M, 11R reel, 14L, 14M, 14R reel motor, 21L, 21M, 21R stop switch, 27 liquid crystal display, 63 main control board, 73 sub control board.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
By displaying the effect image in the display area, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, and a specific effect execution means.
After the game started after the specific effect is completed, a special effect execution means for executing a special effect for notifying whether or not to grant the privilege is provided by displaying the effect image in the display area. ,
During the specific effect, there is a case where the first type effect image suggesting that the privilege is given in the outer peripheral area surrounding the center of the display area, and a case where the first type image is displayed in the outer peripheral area. Differently, the case of displaying the second type of effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for the privilege being given, and the case of the third type of effect in which the degree of expectation suggested in the outer peripheral region is lower than that of the second type. Sometimes an image is displayed,
When the effect image of any one of the first type, the second type, and the third type is displayed in the outer peripheral region during the specific effect, the special effect is started for the effect image in the outer peripheral region. It will be hidden at the timing until it is done, and it will be hidden.
When the notification for granting the privilege is given in the special effect , the first type of effect image may be displayed at a specific timing using the outer peripheral area common to that in the specific effect.
A gaming machine that does not display any of the first type, the second type, and the third type effect images even after the specific timing when the notification that the privilege is not given is given in the special effect.

Images